Black Box

ACX288-ADCTL - Switch Black Box - Free user manual and instructions

Find the device manual for free ACX288-ADCTL Black Box in PDF.

📄 208 pages English EN Download 💬 AI Question
Notice Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - page 6
Pick your language and provide your email: we'll send you a specifically translated version.

User questions about ACX288-ADCTL Black Box

0 question about this device. Answer the ones you know or ask your own.

Ask a new question about this device

The email remains private: it is only used to notify you if someone responds to your question.

No questions yet. Be the first to ask one.

Download the instructions for your Switch in PDF format for free! Find your manual ACX288-ADCTL - Black Box and take your electronic device back in hand. On this page are published all the documents necessary for the use of your device. ACX288-ADCTL by Black Box.

USER MANUAL ACX288-ADCTL Black Box

DKM FX MODULAR KVM MATRIX SWITCHES SERIES

MODULAR KVM MATRIX SWITCHES

24/7 TECHNICAL SUPPORT AT 1.877.877.2269 OR VISIT BLACKBOX.COM

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - MODULAR KVM MATRIX SWITCHES - 1

text_image Illustration of a server rack with labeled control panels and indicator lights

BLACK BOX®

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS....6

Installation 6

Repair....6

1. SPECIFICATIONS....7

1.1 Interfaces 7

1.1.1 DVI-D Single-Link....7

1.1.2 USB-HID 7

1.1.3 RJ-45 (Network) 7

1.1.4 RJ-45 (Serial)....7

1.1.5 RJ-45 (Interconnect) 8

1.1.6 Fiber SFP Type LC (Interconnect) 8

1.1.7 SDI (Interconnect) 8

1.2 Interconnect Cable 8

1.2.1 CATx 8

1.2.2 Fiber 9

1.2.3 Coaxial....10

1.3 Connector Pinouts .... 10

1.3.1 CPU Board....10

1.3.2 I/O Port CATx....11

1.3.3 I/O Port SFP 12

1.3.4 I/O Port SDI 12

1.4 Power Supply 12

1.5 Environmental Conditions .... 13

1.6 Dimensions .... 14

1.7 Shipping Weight....14

1.8 MTBF 14

2. OVERVIEW.... 16

2.1 Application....16

2.2 Access Options 16

2.3 System Overview....17

2.4 Product Range....18

2.5 Options....18

2.6 Device Views....20

2.6.1 576-Port Chassis (ACX576-R2, ACX576S-R2)....20

2.6.2 288-Port Chassis (ACX288-R2)....21

2.6.3 160-Port Chassis (ACX160-R2)....23

2.6.4 80-Port Chassis (ACX080-R2)....24

2.6.5 48-Port Chassis (ACX048-R2)....25

2.7 Diagnostics and Status....26

2.7.1 Status LEDs 26

2.7.2 Port Status....32

2.7.3 Port Status Matrix Grid....36

TABLE OF CONTENTS

2.7.4 Extender OSD 37
2.7.5 Network Status 39
2.7.6 Firmware Status Matrix 41
2.7.7 Firmware Status Extender....43

2.8 Trace Function....44
2.9 Syslog Monitoring 45
2.10 SNMP 47
2.11 System Check 51
2.12 Device Finder ....52

  1. INSTALLATION .... 54

3.1 Package Contents ....54
3.2 System Setup ....54
3.3 Example Applications....55

3.3.1 KVM Matrix....56
3.3.2 Video Matrix....57
3.3.3 Parallel Operation (Stacking) 58
3.3.4 Matrix Grid....59

  1. CONFIGURATION 60

4.1 Command Mode....60
4.2 Control Options 61

4.2.1 Control via OSD 61
4.2.2 Control via Java Tool....65
4.2.3 Control via Serial Interface....71

4.3 Assignment....72

4.3.1 Virtual CPU 72
4.3.2 Virtual Console 74

4.4 System Settings 76

4.4.1 System Data 76
4.4.2 Automatic ID 79
4.4.3 Access 82
4.4.4 Switch 84
4.4.5 Network 88
4.4.6 Date and Time....92

4.5 User Settings 95

4.5.1 User 95
4.5.2 Favorite List Users....98
4.5.3 User Macros....100
4.5.4 User Groups ....104

4.6 Extender Settings....105
Flexible Port Extender Units 107
4.7 USB 2.0 Extender....108
4.8 Extenders for I/O Boards (USB 2.0/USB 3.0)....110

TABLE OF CONTENTS

4.9 Configuration of SDI....113
4.10 CPU Settings....115
4.11 CPU Groups....118
4.12 Console Settings 119

4.12.1 CON Devices 119
4.12.2 Mouse and Keyboard....124
4.12.3 Extender OSD 127
4.12.4 Favorite List Consoles....129
4.12.5 Console Macros....132
4.12.6 Shared Operation....135
4.12.7 Multi-Screen Control....137
4.12.8 Active Directory....140

4.13 Saving and Loading Configurations....143

4.13.1 Active Configuration 143
4.13.2 Saving Configurations (Internal) 143
4.13.3 Loading Configurations (Internal)....146
4.13.4 Saving Configurations (External) 147
4.13.5 Loading Configurations (External)....148

4.14 Export and Import Options....149

4.14.1 Export Options....149
4.14.2 Import Options 150

4.15 Matrix Cascading....151

4.16 Matrix Grid....153
4.17 Management of DDC Information (EDID) 157
4.18 Firmware Update 159

4.18.1 Matrix Update....159
4.18.2 Extender Update 161

4.19 License Management....164

  1. OPERATION....165
    5.1 Operation via Hotkeys....165

5.1.1 Direct Switching 165
5.1.2 Scan Mode....166
5.1.3 Function Keys: - 167
5.1.4 Addressing of Main and Sub Matrices.... 167

5.2 KVM Switching....168
5.3 Exended Switching....171
5.4 Switching via a Macro List 175
5.5 Switching of Single Extenders within Devices....176
5.6 CON Switch....177
5.7 Multi-Screen Control....178
5.8 USB 2.0 Switching....179
5.9 Presets 179
5.10 Redundancy Function ...... 181

TABLE OF CONTENTS

NEED HELP?

LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7

TECHNICAL

SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

5.11 LDAP Integration....183
5.12 Serial Interface....191
5.13 Power On and Power Down Functions 192

5.13.1 Restart....192
5.13.2 Factory Reset 192
5.13.3 Power Down....193

5.14 Summary of Keyboard Commands....194

  1. MAINTENANCE 196
    6.1 Power Supply Units 196
    6.2 Fan Trays....196
    6.3 CPU Board....196
    6.4 I/O Board 197
    6.5 Filter Pads....197

  2. TROUBLESHOOTING....198

7.1 External Failure 198
7.2 Video Interference....198
7.3 Fan Malfunction....198
7.4 Power Supply Units Malfunction....198
7.5 Network Error....198
7.6 Failure at the Matrix....199
7.7 Blank Screen 199

  1. TECHNICAL SUPPORT....200

8.1 Support Checklist....200
8.2 Shipping Checklist 200

  1. REGULATORY INFORMATION 201

9.1 FCC Statement....201
9.2 CE Declaration of Conformity 201
9.3 Product Safety 201
9.4 WEEE 201
9.5 RoHS/RoHS2 201

  1. GLOSSARY 202

10.1 Video and KVM Technology Terms.... 202
10.2 Matrix-Specific Terms.... 203

  1. DISCLAIMER/TRADEMARKS 205

11.1 Disclaimer....205
11.2 Trademarks Used in this Manual.... 205

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

To ensure reliable and safe long-term operation of your Modular KVM Matrix Switch, note the following guidelines.

INSTALLATION

Only use the device according to this User Manual. Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the equipment or injury to the user or installer.
- Only use in dry, indoor environments.
- The Modular KVM Matrix Switch and the power supply units can get warm. Do not install components in an enclosed space without any airflow.
- Do not obscure ventilation holes.
Only use power supplies originally supplied with the product or manufacturer-approved replacements. Do not use a power supply if it appears to be defective or has a damaged chassis.
Connect all power supplies to grounded outlets. In each case, ensure that the ground connection is maintained from the outlet socket through to the power supply's AC power input.
In case the device is equipped with one or more grounding screws, be sure to use these for normal operation to ensure the grounding of the chassis.
Do not connect the link interface to any other equipment, particularly network or telecommunications equipment.
Only connect devices to the serial interface that are protected against short circuit currents and incorrect voltages at the serial interface.
To disconnect the Modular KVM Matrix Switch from the power supply, remove the power cord cables of all power supply units or switch supplies off.
Take any required ESD precautions.
- To disconnect the device completely from the electric circuit, all power cables have to be removed.

REPAIR

  • Do not attempt to open or repair a power supply unit.
    Do not attempt to open or repair the Modular KVM Matrix Switch. There are no user serviceable parts inside.
  • Contact Black Box Technical Support at 877-877-2269 or info@blackbox.com if there is a fault.

1.1 INTERFACES

The video interface supports the DVI-D protocol. All signals that comply with DVI-D Single Link norm can be transmitted. This includes monitor resolutions such as 1920 x 1200 @ 60 Hz, Full HD (1080p) or 2K HD (up to 2048 x 1152). Data rate is limited to 165 MPixel/s.

1.1.2 USB-HID

Modular KVM Desktop Switch devices with USB-HID interface support a maximum of two devices with USB-HID protocol. Each USB-HID port provides a maximum current of 100 mA.

KEYBOARD

The Modular DKM Desktop Switch is compatible with most USB keyboards. Certain keyboards with additional functions may require custom firmware to operate. Keyboards with an integral USB Hub (e.g., Mac keyboards) are also supported.

MOUSE

The Modular DKM Desktop Switch is compatible with most 2-button, 3-button and scroll mice.

OTHER USB-HID DEVICES

The proprietary USB emulation also supports certain other USB-HID devices, such as specific touch screens, graphic tablets, barcode scanners or special keyboards. Support cannot be guaranteed, however, for every USB-HID device.

NOTE: Only two USB-HID devices are supported concurrently, such as keyboard and mouse or keyboard and touch screen. A hub is allowed, but it does not increase the number of HID devices allowed.

To support other USB “non-HID” devices, such as scanners, web cams or memory devices, choose our devices with transparent USB support.

1.1.3 RJ-45 (NETWORK)

The communication of the CATx devices requires a 1000BASE-T connection.

The cabling must comply with EIA/TIA-568-B (1000BASE-T) standards with RJ45 connectors at both ends. All four wire pairs are used in both directions. The cabling is suitable for a full duplex operation. For the cable connection to a source (computer, CPU), you must use a crossed network cable (cross cable).

1.1.4 RJ-45 (SERIAL)

Communication takes place with a transmission speed of 115.2 KBaud, regardless of the file format. The transmission takes place with eight data bits and a stop bit, but without a parity bit. Limited hardware handshake (DSR) is possible.

CHAPTER 1: SPECIFICATIONS

1.1.5 RJ-45 (INTERCONNECT)

Communication between CATx devices requires a 1000BASE-T connection.

Connector wiring must comply with EIA/TIA-568-B (1000BASE-T), with RJ-45 connectors at both ends. All four cable wire pairs are used.

1.1.6 FIBER SFP TYPE LC (INTERCONNECT)

Communication of fiber devices is performed via Gigabit SFPs that are connected to suitable fibers fitted with LC type connectors (see Section 1.2.2).

The correct function of the device can only be guaranteed with SFPs provided by Black Box.

CAUTION: SFP modules can be damaged by electrostatic discharge (ESD). Consider ESD handling specifications.

1.1.7 SDI (INTERCONNECT)

Communication of the SDI devices requires a mini coax connection with mini BNC connectors or 3G SFPs with transmission speeds of 0.36 Gbit/s (SD-SDI, SMPTE 259M), 1.485 Gbit/s (HD-SDI, SMPTE 292M) and 2.97 Gbit/s (3G SDI).

1.2 INTERCONNECT CABLE

1.2.1 C AT X

NOTE: A point-to-point connection is required. Operation with several patch fields is possible. Routing over an active network component, such as an Ethernet Hub, Router or Matrix, is not allowed.

- Avoid routing CATx cables along power cables.

CAUTION: To maintain regulatory EMC compliance, correctly installed shielded CATx cable must be used throughout the interconnection link.

CAUTION: To maintain regulatory EMC compliance, all CATx cables need to carry ferrites on both cable ends close to the device.

TYPE OF INTERCONNECT CABLE

The Modular KVM Matrix Switch requires interconnect cabling specified for Gigabit Ethernet (1000BASE-T). The use of solid-core (AWG24), shielded, CAT5e (or better) is recommended.

TABLE 1-1. CATX INTERCONNECT CABLE TYPES

CABLE TYPEDESCRIPTION
CATx Solid-Core Cable AWG24Cable S/UTP (CAT5e) cable according to EIA/TIA- 568-B. Four pairs of AWG24 wires.Connection according to EIA/TIA-568-B (1000BASE-T).
CATx Patch Cable AWG26/8Cable S/UTP (CAT5e) cable according to EIA/TIA- 568-B. Four pairs of AWG26/8 wires.Connection according to EIA/TIA-568-B (1000BASE-T).

NOTE: The use of flexible cables (patch cables) type AWG26/8 is possible, but the maximum possible extension distance is halved.

CHAPTER 1: SPECIFICATIONS

NEED HELP?

LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7

TECHNICAL

SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

TABLE 1-2. MAXIMUM ACCEPTABLE CATX CABLE LENGTHS

CABLE TYPE LENGTH
CATx Solid-Core Cable AWG24 400 ft. (140 m)
CATx Patch Cable AWG26/8 200 ft. (70 m)

1.2.2 FIBER

NOTE: A point-to-point connection is required. Operation with several patch fields is possible. Routing over an active network component, such as an Ethernet Hub, Router or Matrix, is not allowed.

TABLE 1-3. FIBER INTERCONNECT CABLE TYPES

CABLE TYPE DESCRIPTION
Single-mode 9-μmTwo fibers 9-μmIn-house patch cableIn-house breakout cableIn-house or outdoor breakout cable, resistantOutdoor cable, with protection against rodents
Multimode 50-μmTwo fibers 50-μmIn-house patch cableIn-house or outdoor breakout cable, resistant
Multimode 62.5-μmTwo fibers 62.5-μmIn-house breakout cableOutdoor cable, with protection against rodents

NOTE: Only use single-mode connection cables for fiber connections that are based on 3G SFPs.

TABLE 1-4. MAXIMUM ACCEPTABLE FIBER CABLE LENGTHS

CABLE TYPE1.25 GBPS3.125 GBPS
Single-mode 9-μm32,800 ft. (10,000 m)16,400 ft. (5000 m)
Multimode 50-μm (OM3)3280 ft. (1000 m)1640 ft. (500 m)
Multimode 50-μm1300 ft. (400 m)650 ft. (200 m)
Multimode 62.5-μm650 ft. (200 m)325 ft. (100 m)

NOTE: If you use single-mode SFPs with multimode fibers, you normally can increase the maximum acceptable length.

TABLE 1-5. TYPE OF CONNECTOR

CONNECTORLC CONNECTOR

CHAPTER 1: SPECIFICATIONS

1.2.3 COA XIAL

NOTE: A point-to-point connection is required.

TABLE 1-6. INTERCONNECT COAXIAL CABLE TYPES

CABLE TYPE DESCRIPTION
MIni coaxial cable AWG 18 RG 6, 75 ohms impedance

TABLE 1-7. MAXIMUM COAXIAL CABLE LENGTH

BANDWIDTH MAXIMUM ACCEPTABLE CABLE LENGTH
0.270 Gbit/s 1312 ft. (400 m)
1.485 Gbit/s 459 ft. (140 m)
2.970 Gbit/s 394 ft. (120 m)

TABLE 1-8. TYPE OF CONNECTOR

CONNECTOR MINI BNC CONNECTOR

1.3 CONNECTOR PINOUTS

1.3.1 CPU BOARD

TABLE 1-9. DVI-D SINGLE LINK CONNECTOR PINOUT

PICTUREPINSIGNALPINSIGNALPINSIGNAL
Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - CPU BOARD - 11T.M.D.S. data 2-9T.M.D.S. data 1-17T.M.D.S. data 0-
2T.M.D.S. data 2+10T.M.D.S. data 1+18T.M.D.S. data 0+
3T.M.D.S. data 2 GND11T.M.D.S. data 1 GND19T.M.D.S. data 0 GND
4not connected12not connected20not connected
5not connected13not connected21not connected
6DDC input (SCL)14+5 VDC high impedance22T.M.D.S. clock GND
7DDC output (SCL)15GND23T.M.D.S. clock +
8Internal use16Hot Plug recognition24T.M.D.S. clock -
C1Internal useC3Internal use
C2not connectedC5GNDC4Internal use

CHAPTER 1: SPECIFICATIONS

NEED HELP?

LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7

TECHNICAL

SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

TABLE 1-10. USB TYPE A CONNECTOR PINOUT

PICTURE PIN SIGNAL COLOR
Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - CHAPTER 1: SPECIFICATIONS - 11 VCC (+5 VDC) Red
2 Data - White
3 Data + Green
4 GNDBlack

TABLE 1-11. DB9 SERIAL RS-232, DTE CONNECTOR PINOUT

PICTURE PIN SIGNALPIN SIGNAL
Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - CHAPTER 1: SPECIFICATIONS - 21not connected6DSR
2RxD7RTS
3TXD8CTS
4DTR9not connected
5GND--

TABLE 1-12. RJ-45 CONNECTOR PINOUT

PICTURE PIN SIGNALPIN SIGNAL
Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - CHAPTER 1: SPECIFICATIONS - 31D1+6not connected
2D1-7D2-
3D2+8not connected
4not connected9not connected

1.3.2 I/O PORT CATX

TABLE 1-13. RJ-45

PICTURE PIN SIGNALPIN SIGNAL
Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - I/O PORT CATX - 11D1+5D3-
2D1-6D2-
3D2+7D4+
4D3+8D4-

CHAPTER 1: SPECIFICATIONS

NEED HELP?

LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7

TECHNICAL

SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

1.3.3 I/O PORT SFP

TABLE 1-14. FIBER SFP TYPE LC

PICTURE DIODE SIGNAL
Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - I/O PORT SFP - 11 Data OUT
2Data IN-

1.3.4 I/O PORT SDI

TABLE 1-15. MINI BNC (SDI)

PICTURE PIN SIGNAL
Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - I/O PORT SDI - 11 Data IN
2GND

1.4 POWER SUPPLY

TABLE 1-16. MAXIMUM CURRENT/VOLTAGE

PRODUCT CODE MAX. CURRENT/VOLTAGE
ACX576-R2, ACX576S-R220 A, 100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
ACX288-R212 A, 100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
ACX160-R29 A, 100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
ACX080-R2, ACX048-R25 A, 100-240 Vac, 50/60 Hz

TABLE 1-17. POWER REQUIREMENT

PRODUCT CODE MAX. CURRENT/VOLTAGE
ACX576-R2, ACX576S-R2450 W max.without I/O boards
ACX288-R2 202 W max.without I/O boards
ACX160-R2 188 W max.without I/O boards
ACX080-R2 99 W max.without I/O boards
ACX048-R2 94 W max.without I/O boards
I/O board 13 W max

1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

TABLE 1-18. TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY

SPECIFICATION VALUE
Operating Temperature 41 to 113°F (5 to 45°C)
Storage Temperature -13 to 140°F (-25 to 60°C)
Relative Humidity Max. 80% non-condensing

TABLE 1-19. NOISE EMISSION

SPECIFICATION VALUE
Sound Pressure Level (SPL)ACX576-R2, ACX576S-R2: max. 65 dBA per fan;ACX288-R2: max. 65 dBA per fan;ACX160-R2: max. 65 dBA per fan;ACX080-R2: max. 46 dBA per fan;ACX048-R2: max. 58 dBA per fan

TABLE 1-20. HE AT DISSIPATION

SPECIFICATION VALUE
Thermal Output Corresponds to power consumption in Watts (W)

1.6 DIMENSIONS

TABLE 1-21. DIMENSIONS

PRODUCT CODE SPECIFICATION DIMENSION
ACX576-R2Matrix 43.75"H x 17.7"W x 17.1"D (110.8 x 45 x 43.5 cm)
Shipping Box 49"H x 25.6"W x 26.8"D (124.5 x 65.1 x 68.1 cm)
ACX576S-R2Matrix 43.75"H x 17.7"W x 17.1"D (110.8 x 45 x 43.5 cm)
Shipping Box 49"H x 25.6"W x 26.8"D (124.5 x 65.1 x 68.1 cm)
ACX288-R2Matrix 12"H x 19"W x 22.8"D (33 x 48.3 x 57.8 cm)
Shipping Box 29.9"H x 25.6"W x 26.8"D (76 x 65 x 68 cm)
ACX160-R2Matrix 12"H x 19"W x 15.8"D (33 x 48.3 x 40 cm)
Shipping Box 21.3"H x 25.6"W x 26.8"D (54 x 65 x 68 cm)
ACX080-R2Matrix 9.1"H x 19"W x 7"D (23 x 48.3 x 17.8 cm)
Shipping Box 14.2"H x 25.2"W x 22.4"D (36 x 64 x 57 cm)
ACX048-R2Matrix 9.1"H x 19"W x 5.3"D (23 x 48.3 x 13.3 cm)
Shipping Box 12.4"H x 25.2"W x 22.4"D (31.6 x 64 x 57 cm)

1.7 SHIPPING WEIGHT

TABLE 1-22. SHIPPING WEIGHT

PRODUCT CODE SPECIFICATION WEIGHT
ACX576-R2, ACX576S-R2Matrix170 lb. (77.3 kg) fully equipped
Shipping Box190.6 lb. (86.6 kg)
ACX288-R2Matrix76.2 lb. (34.6 kg), fully equipped
Shipping Box90.6 lb. (41.1 kg)
ACX160-R2Matrix60.0 lb. (26.3 kg), fully equipped
Shipping Box69.9 lb. (31.7 kg)
ACX080-R2Matrix24.5 lb. (11.1 kg), fully equipped
Shipping Box34.4 lb. (15.6 kg)
ACX048-R2Matrix19.6 lb. (8.9 kg), fully equipped
Shipping Box26.7 lb. (12.1 kg)

1.8 MTBF

The following table contains the mean time between failure (MTBF) in power-on hours (POH). The estimate is based on the FIT rates of the parts included. FIT rates are based on normalized environmental conditions of T = 140^ F ( 60^ C) and activation energy (Ea) of 0.7 eV. Calculations are based on 90% confidence limit.

We estimate that inside the housing, temperature will be 59^ F ( 15^ C) higher than the ambient temperature. Therefore, the MTBF calculation refers to an ambient temperature of 113^ F ( 45^ C). The humidity is limited to 60%.

CHAPTER 1: SPECIFICATIONS

TABLE 1-23. MEAN TIME BETWEEN FAILURE (MTBF) IN POWER-ON HOURS (POH)

PRODUCT CODE POH
ACX576-R2 200,000
ACX576S-R2 200,000
ACX288-R2 260,000
ACX160-R2 310,000
ACX080-R2 320,000
ACX048-R2 350,000
CPU board 480,000
I/O board SFP 500,000
I/O board CATx 410,000
ACX288-R2/ACX160-R2 PSU200,000
ACX080-R2, ACX048-R2 PSU130,000

NEED HELP? LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7 TECHNICAL SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

2.1 APPLICATION

The Modular KVM Matrix Switch is used to establish connections from consoles (monitor, keyboard, mouse and other peripheral devices) to various sources (computer, CPU).

In its maximum configuration, up to 576 independent ports can be defined and switched either as a console or a CPU. The Modular KVM Matrix Switch is designed to operate with extenders that are able to transmit video, KVM and USB 2.0 signals. But it can also be used as a video matrix.

The connection between the matrix and the peripheral devices, such as KVM extenders or video sources, can be made by CATx, fiber, or coaxial cables.

The matrix serves as a repeater and can be run at a maximum distance of 6.2 miles (10 km) from the consoles and 6.2 miles (10 km) from the sources.

2.2 ACCESS OPTIONS

The following options are available to configure and operate the Modular KVM Matrix Switch.

TABLE 2-1. SWITCH ACCESS OPTIONS

ACCESS OPTION SYMBOL
OSDBlack Box ACX288-ADCTL - ACCESS OPTIONS - 1
Java ToolBlack Box ACX288-ADCTL - ACCESS OPTIONS - 2
Serial InterfaceBlack Box ACX288-ADCTL - ACCESS OPTIONS - 3
ControlBridgeBlack Box ACX288-ADCTL - ACCESS OPTIONS - 4Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - ACCESS OPTIONS - 5

2.3 SYSTEM OVERVIEW

A Modular KVM Matrix Switch system consists of a Modular KVM Matrix Switch and, for KVM applications, one or more CPU Units / CON Units. The Modular KVM Matrix Switch is connected to the CPU Units / CON Units by interconnect cables or directly to the video devices where used as a video matrix.

CPU Units are connected directly to the sources (computer, CPU) by the provided cables.

Monitor(s), keyboard and mouse are connected to the CON Units.

Communication between the Modular KVM Matrix Switch and the CPU Units / CON Units occurs over the respective interconnect cables.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - SYSTEM OVERVIEW - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Computer 1"] --> B["Hub"]
    C["Computer 2"] --> B
    D["Computer 3"] --> B
    E["Computer 4"] --> B
    F["Computer 5"] --> B
    G["Computer 6"] --> B
    B --> H["Central Hub"]
    style B fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style H fill:#ccf,stroke:#333

FIGURE 2-1. SYSTEM OVERVIEW

TABLE 2-2. SYSTEM OVERVIEW DIAGRAM COMPONENTS

NUMBER IN FIGURE 2-1 COMPONENT
1 Source (computer, CPU)
2 CPU units
3 Interconnect cable
4 Modular KVM Matrix Switch
5 CON units
6 Console (monitor, keyboard, mouse)

NOTE: See Section 3.3 for installation examples.

2.4 PRODUCT RANGE

TABLE 2-3. PRODUCT RANGE

PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION
ACX576-R2, ACX576S-R2 Modular KVM Matrix Switch with 576 ports, unpopulated
ACX288-R2 Modular KVM Matrix Switch with 288 ports, unpopulated
ACX160-R2 Modular KVM Matrix Switch with 160 ports, unpopulated
ACX080-R2 Modular KVM Matrix Switch with 80 ports, unpopulated
ACX048-R2 Modular KVM Matrix Switch with 48 ports, unpopulated

2.5 OPTIONS

TABLE 2-4. OPTIONS

PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION
ACXI08-G2-C CATx I/O board
ACXI08-G2-SM Fiber I/O board, single-mode
ACXI08-G2-HS Fiber I/O Board, High Speed fiber
ACXI08-HS Fiber I/O board, single-mode, 3.125 Gbit/s
ACXI08-6G UNI I/O board for USB 3.0 and SDI
ACXI08-GRIDUsed with any modular DKM to create a cascade between multiple switches, has (2) LC interconnects
ACXI08-SFP This is a blank I/O card that can have copper or fiber installed
ACX288-CTLCPU board
*ACX288-ADCTLDKM FX Controller Card Enhanced Edition
ACXSFPHSSingle-mode GBIC, LC duplex, bidirectional, for use with Modular KVM Matrix Switch (3.125 Gbit/s)
ACX288-FANACX288-R2/ACX160-R2 fan tray (spare part)
ACX080-FANACX080-R2 fan tray (spare part)
ACX048-FANACX048-R2 fan tray (spare part)
ACX288-PSACX288-R2/ACX160-R2 plug-in power supply unit (spare part or redundancy)
ACX080-PSACX080-R2 plug-in power supply unit (spare part or redundancy)
ACX288-FILACX288-R2, ACX160-R2 filter pads as consumable supply
ACX080-FILACX080-R2 filter pads as consumable supply
ACX048-FILACX048-R2 filter pads as consumable supply

*The DKM FX Controller Card Enhanced Edition offers a dual TCP/IP interface (redundant) for monitoring, updates and external control. It has an HDMI connector for local configuration and monitoring console, two USB connectors for local keyboard and mouse access, and an RS-232 interface for connecting media controllers.

2.6 DEVICE VIEWS

The following views of the Modular KVM Matrix Switch illustrate the various available chassis types.

2.6.1 576-PORT CHASSIS (ACX576-R2, ACX576S-R2)

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - 576-PORT CHASSIS (ACX576-R2, ACX576S-R2) - 1

natural_image Front view of a black server rack with multiple drive bays and labeled ports (no readable text or symbols beyond numbered labels)

FIGURE 2-2. 576-PORT CHASSIS, FRONT VIEW

CHAPTER 2: OVERVIEW

NEED HELP?

LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7

TECHNICAL

SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

TABLE 2-5. 576-PORT CHASSIS FRONT VIEW COMPONENTS

NUMBER IN FIGURE 2-2 COMPONENT
1 Grounding
2 Slot for power supply unit 1
3 Slot for power supply unit 2
4 Slot for fan tray 1
5 Slot for fan tray 2
6 Slot for power supply unit 3
7 Slot for I/O boards
8 Slot for CPU board

CHAPTER 2: OVERVIEW

NEED HELP? LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7 TECHNICAL SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

2.6.2 288-PORT CHASSIS (ACX288-R2)

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - 288-PORT CHASSIS (ACX288-R2) - 1

text_image Diagram of a server rack with labeled ports and connectors, showing internal structure and port numbering from 1 to 8.

FIGURE 2-3. 288-PORT CHASSIS, FRONT VIEW

CHAPTER 2: OVERVIEW

NEED HELP?

LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7

TECHNICAL

SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

TABLE 2-6. 288-PORT CHASSIS FRONT VIEW COMPONENTS

NUMBER IN FIGURE 2-3 COMPONENT
1 Slot for power supply unit 1
2 Slot for fan tray 1
3 Slot for power supply unit 2
4 Slot for fan tray 2
5 Slot for I/O boards #1-36
6 Slot for power supply unit 3
7 Grounding
8 Slot for CPU board

2.6.3 160-PORT CHASSIS (ACX160-R2)

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - CHAPTER 2: OVERVIEW - 1

text_image 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

FIGURE 2-4. 160-PORT CHASSIS, FRONT VIEW

TABLE 2-7. 160-PORT CHASSIS FRONT VIEW COMPONENTS

NUMBER IN FIGURE 2-4 COMPONENT
1 Slot for power supply unit 1
2 Slot for fan tray 1
3 Slot for power supply unit 2
4 Slot for fan tray 2
5 Slot for I/O boards #1–20
6 Slot for power supply unit 3
7 Grounding
8 Slot for CPU board

2.6.4 80-PORT CHASSIS (ACX080-R2)

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - 80-PORT CHASSIS (ACX080-R2) - 1

text_image 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

FIGURE 2-5. 80-PORT CHASSIS, FRONT VIEW

TABLE 2-8. 80-PORT CHASSIS FRONT VIEW COMPONENTS

NUMBER IN FIGURE 2-5 COMPONENT
1 Slot for fan tray 1
2 Slot for power supply unit 1
3 Slot for I/O boards #1-10
4 Slot for power supply unit 2
5 Slot for CPU board
6 Slot for air filter
7 Slot for fan tray 2

2.6.5 48-PORT CHASSIS (ACX048-R2)

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - 48-PORT CHASSIS (ACX048-R2) - 1

text_image 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

FIGURE 2-6. 48-PORT CHASSIS, FRONT VIEW

TABLE 2-9. 48-PORT CHASSIS FRONT VIEW COMPONENTS

NUMBER IN FIGURE 2-6 COMPONENT
1 Slot for fan tray 1
2 Slot for power supply unit 1
3 Slot for I/O boards #1-6
4 Slot for power supply unit 2
5 Slot for CPU board
6 Slot for air filter
7 Slot for fan tray 2

2.7 DIAGNOSTICS AND STATUS

2.7.1 STATUS LEDS

Modular KVM Matrix Switch components are fitted with the following LEDs for overall status indication.

CPU BOARD (ACX288-R2-CTL)

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - STATUS LEDS - 1

text_image 1 2

FIGURE 2-7. STATUS LEDS ON CPU BOARD (ACX288-R2-CTL)

TABLE 2-10. CPU STATUS LEDS FUNCTIONS

NUMBER IN FIGURE 2-7LEDSTATUSDESCRIPTION
1 Status LED 1White CPU board is in registration process
Blue flashing Registration of the matrix has started
Red flashing Registration in progress
Green flashing Operating condition
GreenCPU board de-registered
2 Status LED 2White CPU board is in registration process
Red flashing Registration of the matrix has started
OFFOperating condition

NOTE: Due to variations in type, "white" might also appear as light purple or light blue.

CHAPTER 2: OVERVIEW

NEED HELP? LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7 TECHNICAL SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

DKM FX CONTROLLER CARD ENHANCED EDITION (ACX288-R2-ADCTL)

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - CHAPTER 2: OVERVIEW - 1

text_image 1 HDMI/OUT R5232 1 2

FIGURE 2-8. STATUS LEDS ON CPU BOARD (ACX288-R2-ADCTL)

TABLE 2-11. CPU STATUS LEDS FUNCTIONS

NUMBER IN FIGURE 2-8LEDSTATUSDESCRIPTION
1 Status LED 1White CPU board is in registration process
Blue flashing Registration of the matrix has started
Red flashing Registration in progress
Green flashing Operating condition
Green CPU board de-registered
2 Status LED 2White CPU board is in registration process
Red flashing Registration of the matrix has started
OFFOperating condition

NOTE: Due to variations in type, "white" might also appear as light purple or light blue.

I/O BOARD
Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - CHAPTER 2: OVERVIEW - 2

FIGURE 2-9. STATUS LEDS ON I/O BOARDS
TABLE 2-12. STATUS LEDS ON THE I/O BOARDS

NUMBER IN FIGURE 2-9LEDSTATUSDESCRIPTION
1 Status 1Light Blue I/O board boot process
Red flashing I/O board registration process
Red/Yellow flashingI/O board in service mode or firmware conflict with CPU board
Green flashingOperating condition. I/O board registered at the matrix
GreenI/O board de-registered (locking pin pulled out)
2 Status 2WhiteI/O board boot process
BlueI/O board registration process
Blue flashingOperating condition. Communication active with CPU board active
Red flashing I/O board de-registered (locking pin pulled out)

CHAPTER 2: OVERVIEW

NEED HELP? LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7 TECHNICAL SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

PORTS I/O BOARD
Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - CHAPTER 2: OVERVIEW - 1

FIGURE 2-10. STATUS LEDS ON THE PORTS OF THE I/O BOARDS
TABLE 2-13. STATUS LEDS ON THE PORTS OF THE I/O BOARDS

NUMBER IN FIGURE 2-10LEDSTATUSDESCRIPTION
1Link Status (orange)OffPort not activated
FlashingPort activated, no connection via interconnect cable
2Link Status (green)OffPort not activated
FlashingPort activated, no connection via interconnect cable
OnConnection via interconnect cable OK, data traffic active

CHAPTER 2: OVERVIEW

NEED HELP? LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7 TECHNICAL SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

FAN TRAY

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - CHAPTER 2: OVERVIEW - 1

text_image FAN TRAY OK ! HS 1 2 3

FIGURE 2-11. STATUS LEDS ON THE PORTS OF THE I/O BOARDS

TABLE 2-14. FAN TRAY LEDS

NUMBER IN FIGURE 2-11 COMPONENT
1 Status LED 1
2 Status LED 2
3 Hot Swap LED

TABLE 2-15. STATUS LEDS ON THE FAN TRAYS

NUMBER IN FIGURE 2-11LEDSTATUSDESCRIPTION
1 Status 1 (green) On Operating condition
2 Status 2 (red)Off Operating condition
On Error indication
3 Hot Swap (blue)Off Hot Swap option deactivated
On Hot Swap option activated

POWER SUPPLY UNIT FOR ACX288-R2 AND ACX160-R2

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - CHAPTER 2: OVERVIEW - 2

text_image 1 2 3

FIGURE 2-12. STATUS LEDS ON THE POWER SUPPLY UNIT

TABLE 2-16. STATUS LEDS ON THE ACX288-R2/ACX160-R2 POWER SUPPLY UNIT

NUMBER IN FIGURE 2-12LEDSTATUSDESCRIPTION
1 AC Input OK (green) ON Operating condition
2 DC Output OK (green) OFF Operating condition
3 O/T (yellow)OFF Normal temperature
ON High temperature

POWER SUPPLY UNIT FOR ACX080-R2 AND ACX048-R2

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - CHAPTER 2: OVERVIEW - 3

natural_image Front panel of a network device showing an Ethernet port, I/O interface, and a terminal labeled '1' (no text or symbols beyond labels)

FIGURE 2-13. STATUS LED ON THE POWER SUPPLY UNIT

TABLE 2-17. STATUS LEDS ON THE ACX080-R2/ACX048-R2 POWER SUPPLY UNIT

NUMBER IN FIGURE 2-13LEDSTATUSDESCRIPTION
1 DC Input OK (green)ON Operating condition
OFF No power supply
DC Input (red)ON Power supply unit not active. Matrix is powered by second power supply.
OFF Operating condition

CHAPTER 2: OVERVIEW

2.7.2 PORT STATUS

The connections and the switching status between the various consoles and CPUs are shown in this menu.

You have the following option to access the menu:

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - PORT STATUS - 1

JAVA TOOL

The current port configuration of the Modular KVM Matrix Switch is illustrated in this menu.

Select Status > Matrix View in the task area when connected to the matrix.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - JAVA TOOL - 1

text_image File Edit Device Express Open Save Reload Connect Disconnect Activate Online Configuration Save Online Changes Download Upload Monitoring Report Device Finder System Check Save Status 2015E123114903_Demo_Config.sp Master Status - Matrix View 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 CPU Insert Name: 172.24.8.08 Submit Weeks: 205.265.265.3 Gateway: 172.24.8.26.4 View Address: 08.21.19 02.00.08 Control Administration Assignment System Definition 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 GAT GAT GAT GAT GAT GAT GAT GAT GAT GAT GAT GAT GAT GAT GAT GAT GAT GAT GAT GAT GAT GAT GAT GAT GAT GAT GAT GAT GAT GAT GAT GAT GAT GAT GAT GAT GAT GAT GAT GAT GAT GAT GAT GAT GAT GAT GAT GAT GAT GAT GAT 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 CPU Options Automatic Prcad Show Port Numbers Grid Ports Local Ports Show Multi-Screen Control Show Redundert Lines (LTLZ) X3 Port Color Coding Full Access Video Access Grid Line Invald Port No Access Fixed Port X3 Port Bandouts Multi Screen Control Redundancy Change Description

FIGURE 2-14. STATUS—MATRIX VIEW (EXAMPLE #1)

CHAPTER 2: OVERVIEW

NEED HELP?

LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7

TECHNICAL

SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - CHAPTER 2: OVERVIEW - 1

text_image Open... Save... Reload... Connect ... Disconned... Activate Online Configuration Save Online Changes Download... Upload... Monitoring Report... Device Finder... System Check... Save Status... 2010E/23114803_Demo_Config.zip - Master Status Matrix View Grid Port view Matrix Firmware E37 Firmware Control Administration Assignment System Definition Status - Matrix View 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 CPU Host name: 472.24.9.05 Submit Web: 295.295.295.5 Gateway: 472.24.9.294 Mac Address: 58.31.97-0200008 Options Automatic Retard Show Port Numbers ScanPhoto: Local/Work Show Multi-Screen Control Show Redundant Line (L14,2) X3 Port Color Coding Full Access Video Access Grid Line Invest Port No Access Fixed Port X3 Port Symbols X Multi Screen Control Y ReAccuracy V Close Connection

FIGURE 2-15. STATUS—MATRIX VIEW (EXAMPLE #2)

The colors indicate the connection status.

TABLE 2-18. STATUS LEDS

COLOR IN FIGURES 2-14 AND 2-15 DESCRIPTION
Gray Port not connected
Yellow Video connection
Green KVM connection
Red Faulty port
Blue Port connected to another matrix via grid line

CHAPTER 2: OVERVIEW

NEED HELP?

LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7

TECHNICAL

SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

The symbol indicates the extender that is recognized and defined at a certain port.

TABLE 2-19. SYMBOLS

SYMBOL DESCRIPTION
Port connected to a CPU Unit
Port is connected to a CPU Unit that is switched to a CON Unit in Private Mode
Port connected to a CON Unit
Port connected to a CON Unit with Shared Access to a CPU
Port is connected to a CON Unit that is connected to a CPU Unit in Private Mode
Port connected to a USB 2.0 CPU Unit
Port connected to a USB 2.0 CON Unit
Port is configured as Cascade-CON port for cascading of matrices
Port is configured as Cascade-CPU port for cascading of matrices
Port is a UNI port of an I/O board that can be used for USB 3.0 or SDI switching
UNICONUNI port is configured as CON port to connect USB 3.0 CON extenders, for example
UNICPUUNI port is configured as CPU port to connect USB 3.0 CPU extenders, for example

NOTES:

  • Red framed ports are defined as "fixed" (e. g. for USB 2.0 connections).
  • The port with four static blue squares is currently selected.
    If a port is selected, all other ports are transparent, except those connected to the currently selected port. To clear a selection, press the Clear Selection button.
    In Matrix View, a red cross on a port indicates that the console to be connected does not have access rights to the respective CPU at this port.

Press the left mouse button to show the extender information of the currently selected port on the right hand side of the working area.

The following information is available:

TABLE 2-20. EXTENDER INFORMATION OF THE CURRENTLY SELECTED PORT

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Extender Name Name of selected extender
Extender Type Type of selected extender
Port ID Number of selected port
Device Name Name of connected console or CPU
ConnectionsListing of assigned connections to marked port (Full Access or Video Access)

Press the right mouse button to open the context menu with additional functions for the currently selected port.

The following functions are available:

TABLE 2-21. CONTEXT FUNCTIONS

FUNCTIONDESCRIPTION
Open ExtenderThe menu for definition of the currently selected extender will be opened
Open DeviceThe menu for definition of the currently selected console or CPU will be opened
SwitchThe menu for execution of switching operations will be opened

CHAPTER 2: OVERVIEW

To reload the Matrix View, you have the following options:

  • Press on a connected keyboard
    ◆ Execute Edit > Reload in the menu bar
  • Press the Reload button in the tool bar

2.7.3 PORT STATUS MATRIX GRID

In this menu, the connections and the switching status between the various CON and CPU Devices are shown within the Matrix Grid.

The port view is divided into the different Grid matrices. As a result, each matrix is displayed in an optimized view of 24 ports per line to be able to show also a larger number of ports.

You have the following option to access the menu:

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - PORT STATUS MATRIX GRID - 1

JAVA TOOL

The current port configuration of the Matrix Grid is illustrated in this menu.

Select Status > Grid Port View in the task area when connected to the matrix.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - JAVA TOOL - 1

text_image File ESM Device Eymas Open Save Retired Connect Disconnected Activate Online Configuration Save Online Changes Download Upload Monitoring Report Device Finder System Check Save Status 2010E12314853_Demo_Config Spain Master Status Grid Port View Status - Grid Port View Matrix View Grid Port View Matrix Firmware EXT Firmware Control Administration Assignment System Definition Device: Terra_268 IP Address: 172.34.6.50 Master Device: Terra KVMT Se26 IP Address: 172.34.6.15 Connect Automatic Retired Show Port Numbers Show Multi-Screen Control Show Redundant Links (5/11.2) X3 Port Color Coding Full Access Video Access Grid Line Invest Port No Access Fixed Port X3 Port Symbols Multi-Screen Control Redundancy Clear Connection

FIGURE 2-16. STATUS—GRID PORT VIEW

CHAPTER 2: OVERVIEW

NEED HELP? LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7 TECHNICAL SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

NOTE: Functions, colors and symbols used in the Grid Port View are identical to those in the port status of the Matrix View.

2.7.4 EXTENDER OSD

All extenders used with the Modular KVM Matrix Switch are provided with their own OSD to display the connection status of the console.

CON 010148887

CPU : 01002 CPU_010148543

ACCESS : Full Access

SHARES:1 device(s)

FIGURE 2-17. EXTENDER OSD

The following information is shown in the OSD menu:

TABLE 2-22. OSD MENU INFORMATION

FIELD DESCRIPTION
CON Name of console
CPUName of currently connected CPUColor Coding:Green: The connection to the selected CPU is completely established.Yellow: The connection to the selected CPU is partially established.Red: The connection to the selected CPU cannot be established.NOTE: Possible reasons for any incomplete or non-established connection can be switched off extenders or insufficiently available Grid lines in Matrix Grid operation.
ACCESSFull Access: Console has a KVM connection to the displayed CPU.Video Access: Console has a video only connection to the displayed CPU.Private Mode: Console has a Private Mode connection to the displayed CPU.not connected: Console is not connected to a CPU.
SHAREDx device(s) shows the exact number of devices that are connected to the current CPU of the console (e.g. 3 devices).If the field remains empty, no other devices are connected to the current CPU.

NOTE: If the options Mouse Connect or Keyboard Connect are used, the name of the console with keyboard / mouse control will be displayed on those consoles that do not have current K/M control. The console is displayed in yellow under Access.

CHAPTER 2: OVERVIEW

NEED HELP?

LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7

TECHNICAL

SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

2.7.5 NETWORK STATUS

The current network configuration is shown in this menu.

You have the following options to access the menu:

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - NETWORK STATUS - 1

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - NETWORK STATUS - 2

The following information is shown in this menu:

TABLE 2-23. NETWORK CONFIGURATION

FIELD DESCRIPTION
DHCPInformation whether the network settings are applied dynamically. Display Y (Yes) or N (No)
IP Address Information about the IP address as provided manually or via DHCP
Subnet Mask Information about the subnet mask as provided manually or via DHCP
Gateway Information about the gateway address as provided manually or via DHCP
MAC ID Information about the MAC address of the matrix

OSD

Select Status > Network in the main menu.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - OSD - 1

text_image CON 010167832 Status ESO Network Interface DHCP : YES Enable configuration of network parameters via DHCP server IP Address : 192.168.100.211 Subnet Mask : 255.255.255.000 Gateway : 192.168.100.001 MAC ID : 00:21:5F:02:00:61 Network Services API Service : YES Enable GPI Service port (5SSS) FTP Server : YES Enable FTP Server for configuration file transfers Syslog #1: NO Enable Syslog Server #1 Syslog Server #1: 000.000.000.000:514 Syslog #2: NO Enable Syslog Server #2 Syslog Server #2: 000.000.000.000:514 LDAP : NO Enable authentication with Active Directory Server LDAP Server : 000.000.000.000:389 LDAP Base DN : Log Levels Trace : DEB NO INF NO NOT YES WAR YES ERR YES Syslog #1: DEB NO INF NO NOT YES WAR YES ERR YES Syslog #2: DEB NO INF NO NOT YES WAR YES ERR YES

FIGURE 2-18. STATUS>NETWORK

CHAPTER 2: OVERVIEW

NEED HELP? LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7 TECHNICAL SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

JAVA TOOL

  1. Select Status > Matrix View in the task area.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - JAVA TOOL - 1

text_image Status - Matrix View 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 C:\ CPU Host Name: 172.24/8.55 Submit Waste: 200.24/5.00/8 Gateway: 172.24/5.25/8 Mac Address: 96.21.97.53.00/88 Options Automatically Spread Show Port Numbers Grid Tools Local Ports Show Multi-Screen Control Show Redundled Lines (LTLZ) KD Port Color Coding Full Access View Access Grid Line In-aid Port No Access Fixed Port KD Port Symbols Multi-Screen Control Accessibility Close Selection

FIGURE 2-19. STATUS—MATRIX VIEW

  1. Use the left mouse button to click on the network port of the CPU board. The corresponding network status will be shown on the right hand side of the working area.

The available information can be faded in or hidden by pressing the left mouse button on the "plus" or "minus" icon.

CHAPTER 2: OVERVIEW

NEED HELP? LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7 TECHNICAL SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

2.7.6 FIRMWARE STATUS MATRIX

The current firmware status of the installed boards is shown in this menu.

You have the following options to access the menu:

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - FIRMWARE STATUS MATRIX - 1

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - FIRMWARE STATUS MATRIX - 2

The following information is shown in this menu:

TABLE 2-24. FIRMWARE STATUS INFORMATION

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Name Description of modules
Type Type number
Ports Number of ports
Version Complete description of firmware version
Date Date of firmware version
Status Module status

OSD

Select Status > Firmware in the main menu.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - OSD - 1

text_image 63000 CON 010123614 Status Firmware Slot Firmware 00 01 108SFP 108 8 F02 02 09.08 11 02 108SFP 108 8 F02.02 09.08.11 03 108SFP 108 8 F02.02 09.08.11 06 108CAT 108 8 F02.02 09.08.11 10 108SFP 108 8 F02.02 09.08.11 13 108CAT 108 8 F02.02 09.08.11 30 108SFP 108 8 F02.02 09.08.11 SWITCH 01

FIGURE 2-20. STATUS—FIRMWARE

CHAPTER 2: OVERVIEW

NEED HELP? LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7 TECHNICAL SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

JAVA TOOL

  1. Select Status > Matrix Firmware in the task area.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - JAVA TOOL - 1

text_image Status - Matrix Firmware Status Name Type Ports Serial Number Version Date Status TERRA_288 Status 268 0000000000 00 MATCOSA CPU 1 0000000000 F53.00 2014-09-21 Available MATCOSA QSO 1 F53.14 2014-02-05 MATCOSA HSD 2 F53.03 2014-08-16 01 MATCOSAT YR 8 0000000000 B53.00 2014-09-21 Available MATCOSO QSO 8 F53.03 2014-04-04 02 MATCOSAT KIR 8 0000000000 B53.00 2014-09-21 Available MATCOSO QSO 8 F53.03 2014-08-16 03 MATCOSAT YR 8 0000000000 B53.00 2014-09-21 Available MATCOSO QSO 8 F53.03 2014-08-04 04 MATCOSAT KIR 8 0000000000 B53.00 2014-09-21 Available MATCOSO QSO 8 F53.03 2014-04-04 05 MATCOSAT KIR 8 0000000000 B53.06 2014-09-21 Available MATCOSO QSO 8 F53.03 2014-04-04 06 MATCOSAT KIR 8 0000000000 B53.05 2014-09-21 Available MATCOSO QSO 8 F53.23 2014-08-24 07 MATCOSAT YR 8 0000000000 B53.54 2014-08-21 Available MATCOSO QSO 8 F53.23 2014-08-24 08 MATCOSAT KIR 8 6 666666666 B53.56 2014-09-21 Available MATCOSO QSO 8 F53.53 2014-09-24 09 MATCOSAT YR 8 666666666 B53.56 2014-09-21 Available MATCOSO QSO 8 F53.53 2014-04-24 10 MATCOSAT KIR 8 666666666 B53.56 2014-09-21 Available MATCOSO QSO 8 F53.53 2014-04-24 11 MATCOSAT KIR 8 666666666 B53.56 2014-09-21 Available MATCOSO QSO 8 F53.53 2014-04-24 12 MATCOSAT KIR 8 666666666 B53.56 2014-09-21 Available MATCOSO QSO 8 F53.53 2014-04-24 13 MATCOSAT KIR 8 666666666 B53.56 2014-09-21 Available

FIGURE 2-21. STATUS—MATRIX FIRMWARE

  1. To read out the overall status of the matrix and store it locally (file extension .zip), select Matrix > Save Status or press the respective button in the symbol bar.

The various modules can expanded and retracted in the Name column by clicking with the left mouse button on the plus or minus symbols.

By clicking on the plus or minus symbol in the upper right corner of the working area you can expand and retract all module information with one click of the left mouse button.

2.7.7 FIRMWARE STATUS EXTENDER

The current firmware status of connected extenders is shown in this menu.

You have the following option to access the menu:

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - FIRMWARE STATUS EXTENDER - 1

The following information is shown in this menu:

TABLE 2-25. FIRMWARE STATUS OF CONNECTED EXTENDERS INFORMATION

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Name Description of firmware
Type Description of extender module
Ports Number of ports
Cur. Version Description of current firmware version
Cur. Date Date of current firmware version

Select Status > EXT Firmware in the task area.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - FIRMWARE STATUS EXTENDER - 2

text_image Open... Save Reload Connect Disconnect Activate Online Configuration Save Online Changes Download... Upload... Monitoring Report... Device Finder... System Check... Save Status... 20150123114903_Dams_Config.jsp\Master Status Matrix View Grid Port View Matrix Formware EXT Formware Control Administration Assignment System Definition Status - EXT Firmware Extender Firmware Extender Formware on IO Board Extender View ComponentView ID Name Port Type Version Date TERRA_288 Tens_288 Matrix 01 0100002 UQ2_118_1_1 CPU UNIT 02 0100017 UQ2_102_1_1 CPU UNIT 03 0100015 UQ2_101_3_3 CPU UNIT 04 0001106 UQ2_118_8_1 CPU UNIT 05 0100071 UQ1_21_2_1 CPU UNIT 06 0100067 EXT CPU UNIT 07 0100066 EXT CPU UNIT 08 0100065 EXT CPU UNIT 09 0100064 EXT CPU UNIT 10 0100063 EXT CPU UNIT 11 0100062 EXT CPU UNIT 12 0100061 EXT CPU UNIT 13 0100059 EXT CPU UNIT 14 0100058 EXT CPU UNIT 15 0100057 EXT CPU UNIT 16 0100056 EXT CPU UNIT 17 0100055 EXT CPU UNIT 18 0100054 EXT CPU UNIT 19 0100053 EXT CPU UNIT 20 0100052 EXT CPU UNIT 21 0100051 EXT CPU UNIT 22 0100050 EXT CPU UNIT 23 0100049 EXT CPU UNIT 24 0100048 EXT CPU UNIT 25 0100047 EXT CPU UNIT 26 0100046 EXT CPU UNIT 27 0100045 EXT CPU UNIT 28 0100044 EXT CPU UNIT 29 0100043 EXT CPU UNIT 30 0100042 EXT CPU UNIT 31 0100041 EXT CPU UNIT 32 0100040 EXT CPU UNIT 33 0100039 EXT CPU UNIT 34 0100038 EXT CPU UNIT 35 0100037 EXT CPU UNIT 36 0100036 EXT CPU UNIT 37 0100035 EXT CPU UNIT 38 0100034 EXT CPU UNIT 39 0100033 EXT CPU UNIT 40 0100032 EXT CPU UNIT 41 0100031 EXT CPU UNIT 42 010003Terms_288NamePortTypeVersionDate

FIGURE 2-22. STATUS—EXT FIRMWARE

2.8 TRACE FUNCTION

All events, e.g. activities and switching operations of the Modular KVM Matrix Switch are logged and displayed in this menu.

This function is used for diagnostic purposes.

You have the following option to request various trace views in the menu:

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - TRACE FUNCTION - 1

The following information is shown in this menu:

TABLE 2-25. TRACE FUNCTION MENU

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Date Date stamp
Time Time stamp
Message Detailed description of the event

Trace possibilities:

- Select Status > Trace IO Board in the main menu to check the events on your current I/O board.

- Select Status > Trace Matrix to check the matrix events.

2.9 SYSLOG MONITORING

The complete logging of the Modular KVM Matrix Switch activities, switching operations and surveillance of the function of critical components such as fans or power supply units takes place in this menu.

You have the following option to access the menu:

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - SYSLOG MONITORING - 1

To start Syslog Monitoring, proceed as follows:

- Select the Monitoring symbol in the symbol bar.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - SYSLOG MONITORING - 2

text_image Edit Edit Devices Options Open Save Reload Connect Disconnect Activate Online Configuration Save Online Changes Download Upload Monitoring Report Device Finder System Check Save Status... 2015/03/23 114803_Demo_Config(bp)Master Monitoring Status - Syslog Filter Find Data Facility Severity Host Message Filter Date Facility Security Host App Name Proc ID Mag ID Message 2014-07-02T12:47:24.969 user NOTICE MAIN CPU NOT SoftwareSetCpus: CPU+1029 CON=3024 2014-07-02T12:47:15.400 user INFO MAIN CPU INF msGetOutputPrt(1): OUT=132 R=53 2014-07-02T12:47:15.400 user INFO MAIN CPU INF secConnectCpus: CPU+1029 CON=3030 2014-07-02T12:47:15.400 user INFO MAIN CPU INF secDisconnectCpusLstd(1): CPU=1029 2014-07-02T12:47:15.400 user NOTICE MAIN CPU NOT SoftwareSetCpus: CPU+1029 CON=3030 2014-07-02T12:45:02.459 user INFO MAIN CPU INF msGetOutputPrt(1): OUT=132 R=5 2014-07-02T12:45:02.459 user INFO MAIN CPU INF secConnectCpus: CPU+1029 CON=3024 2014-07-02T12:45:02.459 user INFO MAIN CPU INF secDisconnectCpusLstd(1): CPU=1029 2014-07-02T12:45:02.459 user NOTICE MAIN CPU NOT SoftwareSetCpus: CPU+1029 CON=3024 2014-07-02T12:44:56.388 user INFO MAIN CPU INF msGetOutputPrt(1): OUT=43 R=57 2014-07-02T12:44:56.388 user INFO MAIN CPU INF msGetOutputPrt(1): OUT=67 R=4 2014-07-02T12:44:56.388 user INFO MAIN CPU INF secConnectCpusCon(1): CPU+67 CON=3041 2014-07-02T12:44:56.379 user INFO MAIN CPU INF msGetOutputPrt(1): OUT=43 R=8 2014-07-02T12:44:56.379 user INFO MAIN CPU INF secDisconnectCon(1): CON=3041 2014-07-02T12:44:56.369 user INFO MAIN CPU INF msGetOutputPrt(1): OUT=134 R=8 2014-07-02T12:44:56.369 user INFO MAIN CPU INF secDisconnectCpus(1): CPU=1032 2014-07-02T12:44:56.358 user NOTICE MAIN CPU NOT SoftwareSetCpus(1): CPU+188 CON=3036 2014-07-02T12:44:56.738 user INFO MAIN CPU INF msGetOutputPrt(1): OUT=192 R=53 2014-07-02T12:44:56.738 user INFO MAIN CPU INF secConnectCpus(1): CPU+1029 CON=3038 Save Trace Clear Trace Pause

FIGURE 2-22. MONITORING—SYSLOG

Logging of system activities starts when the Monitoring menu is opened and remains active until the tab is closed.

NOTE: Syslog messages are transmitted via UDP. Therefore, port 514 within the used network should not be blocked, e.g. by a firewall.

During logging, the activities are written continuously into logging files and stored locally. This process can be set with various options.

CHAPTER 2: OVERVIEW

NEED HELP?

LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7

TECHNICAL

SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

OPTIONS

- Select Extras > Options in the menu bar and open the tab.

The following options are available:

TABLE 2-27. SYSLOG OPTIONS

OPTION DESCRIPTION
Log File Directory Default directory to store the log files
Log File Name Default name of the log file
Log File Extension Default extension for the log file
Daily Log files Log files are stored every 24 hours (daily)
Maximum Log File Size (KB) Allowed maximum size of log file
Maximum Number of Log FilesAllowed maximum number of log files
AutostartWhen starting the Java Tool, the Syslog function will be started in the background
Open Monitoring TabWhen starting the Java Tool, the Monitoring tab will be opened

NOTE: When reaching the maximum log file size, a new log file will be created. When reaching the maximum number of log files, the oldest one will be overwritten with the new information.

FILTER FUNCTION

To filter relevant messages out of a number of logged activities of the Modular KVM Matrix Switch, the Syslog Monitoring offers various filter options.

To set and activate a filter, proceed as follows:

  1. Set the desired filter option(s) by activating the respective checkbox(es).
  2. Activate the filter settings by pressing the Filter button.
  3. To deactivate an activated filter setting, press the Clear button.

The following filter options are available:

TABLE 2-28. FILTER OPTIONS

OPTIONDESCRIPTION
DateMessages for a defined date range will be filtered
FacilityMessages for a defined facility will be filtered
SeverityMessages for a defined severity will be filtered
HostMessages for a defined host will be filtered
MessageMessages with defined text parts will be filtered

NOTE: Filter options are not valid within the locally stored log files.

CHAPTER 2: OVERVIEW

NEED HELP?

LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7

TECHNICAL

SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

RECORDING FUNCTION

All messages shown in the Syslog are equipped with various recording functions.

To store messages shown in the Syslog (filtered or unfiltered), press the Save trace button. The messages will be stored in a .txt file.
- To remove messages shown in the Syslog, press the Clear trace button.
- To stop recording messages, press the Pause button. To continue, press the button again.

2.10 SNMP

The SNMP function allows all function-critical and safety-critical elements of the matrix to be monitored and queried. This function complies with the RFC 1157 standard.

NOTE: When using SNMP monitoring, we recommend using a dedicated network to maintain continuous access.

You have the following options to configure the SNMP monitoring:

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - SNMP - 1

text_image OSD JAVA

OSD

To activate the SNMP agent, proceed as follows:

  1. Select Configuration > SNMP in the main menu.

CHAPTER 2: OVERVIEW

NEED HELP? LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7 TECHNICAL SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - CHAPTER 2: OVERVIEW - 1

text_image adminRCON 010167832 Configuration ESC SNMP Agent Enable : N Activate the SNMP agent for GEI requests and traps SNMP Server Enable Traps : N Server #1 N Server #2 Server Address : 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 Status : N N Temperature : N Insert Board : N N Remove Board : N N Invalid Board : N Insert Extender : N N Remove Extender : N N Switch Command : N N Fan Iray #1 : N N Fan Iray #2 : N N Power Supply #1 : N N Power Supply #2 : N N Power Supply #3 : N N Cancel Okay SWITCH_01

FIGURE 2-24. CONFIGURATION—SNMP

  1. Set the Enable option to Y (Yes) under SNMP Agent. By activating this option, the permission for an active query of the SNMP agent is granted.

To configure an SNMP server, proceed as follows:

  • Select Configuration > SNMP in the main menu.
  • Set the Enable Traps option to Y (Yes) within SNMP Server. This function allows an active transmission of trap messages from the SNMP agent to the SNMP server.
  • Set the IP address of the SNMP server within Server Address.
  • Activate the requested traps by enabling them to Y (Yes).

CHAPTER 2: OVERVIEW

NEED HELP?

LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7

TECHNICAL

SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

You can select the following traps:

TABLE 2-29. TRAPS

TRAP DESCRIPTION
Status Notification about matrix status
Temperature Notification about temperature within the matrix
Insert Board Notification about insertion of a new I/O board into a slot
Remove Board Notification about removal of an I/O board out of a slot
Invalid Board Notification about a faulty I/O board
Insert ExtenderNotification about a newly connected extender to the matrix, notification about a switched on extender, notification about a newly established link between extender and matrix
Remove ExtenderNotification about a removed extender from the matrix, notification about a switched off extender, notification about an interrupted link between extender and matrix
Switch Command Notification about a performed switching operation at the matrix
Fan Tray #1 Notification about the status of fan tray #1
Fan Tray #2Notification about the status of fan tray #2
Power Supply #1Notification about the status of power supply unit #1
Power Supply #2Notification about the status of power supply unit #2
Power Supply #3Notification about the status of power supply unit #3

To query the SNMP status, proceed as follows:

  1. Select Status > SNMP in the main menu.

NOTE: To activate the SNMP agent function or the SNMP server function, you must restart the matrix.

Two SNMP servers can be used at the same time.

CHAPTER 2: OVERVIEW

NEED HELP? LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7 TECHNICAL SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

JAVA TOOL

To activate the SNMP agent, proceed as follows:

  1. Select System > Network in the task area.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - JAVA TOOL - 1

text_image Open... Save... Reload... Connect... Disconnect... Activate Online Configuration Save Online Changes Download Upload Monitoring Report Device Finder System Check Save Status 20150416111833_Demo_Config() Master System - Network General System SIMBIP LDAP Show Help SMBIP Agent (Online change request a matrix restart) SMBIP Agent Enable SIMBIP Agent for GET requests and Traps Port SMBIP Trap (Online change request a matrix restart) Trap Receiver 1 Trap Receiver 2 Enable Traps SMBIP Server 15 5 10 50 Port 762 Status Switch Command Temperature Fan Tray 1 Insert IO Board Fan Tray 2 Remove IO Board Power Supply 1 Invlaid IO Board Power Supply 2 Insert Extender Power Supply 3 Remove Extender Cancel

FIGURE 2-25. SYSTEM-NETWORK

  1. Activate the SNMP Agent option in the SNMP tab. By activating this option, the permission for an active query of the SNMP agent is granted.

To configure an SNMP server, proceed as follows:

- Select Configuration > Network in the task area.

- Activate the Enable Traps option within SNMP Server. This function allows an active transmission of trap messages from the SNMP agent to the SNMP server.

- Set the IP address of the SNMP within SNMP Server.

- Activate the requested traps.

NOTE: To activate the SNMP agent function or the SNMP server function, you must restart the matrix.

2.11 SYSTEM CHECK

System Check offers a diagnostic function for checking the matrix configuration. The feature indicates suboptimal and faulty settings.

System Check is exclusively used for a confidence check and does not make any active changes in the configuration.

You have the following option to access the menu:

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - SYSTEM CHECK - 1

The following configuration parts are checked:

Matrix Firmware
◆ Extender Firmware
- Multi-Screen Control
Ext Units
CPU Devices
CON Devices
User
- System Configuration
Matrix Grid

The following notification levels can be shown:

TABLE 2-30. NOTIFICATION LEVELS

LEVEL DESCRIPTION
OK (green) System Check completed without any abnormalities
WARNING (yellow)System Check revealed abnormalities in the configuration that point to incomplete parts of the configuration, firmware differences, duplications or unconnected extenders but without being system critical
ERROR (red)System Check revealed errors in the configuration that can have both functional and system-critical influences on the system

NOTE: If the messages "WARNING" and "ERROR" are generated by the System Check function, the respective problem will be described and a basic guideline will be provided.

CHAPTER 2: OVERVIEW

NEED HELP? LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7 TECHNICAL SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

To start System Check, proceed as follows:

- Select the System Check symbol in the symbol bar.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - CHAPTER 2: OVERVIEW - 1

text_image File Edit Device Express 1 Open... Save... Removed... Connect... Goodened... Adjust Online Configuration / Save Online Changes... Download... Upload... Monitoring... Report... Device Finder... System Check... Save Status... 2016/02/31/14/03_Demo_Confico:Master -C:\System Check - EPCB -E System Check The System Check helps to disclose possible sources of error within the configuration of the matrix. Test results are listed as recommendations in order to support over personal check of the configuration. Matrix Firmware Extender Firmware Extender firmware version conflict Check extender firmware in Status > EXT Firmware. Ports EXT Units 1 extender(s) with port number '0' detected Check extender(s) with port number '0' in Definition > EXT Units CPU Devices CPU Device without extender assignment ID = 1305, Name = SKY E216, N Check assignment in Definition > CPU Devices. CPU Devices CPU Device without extender assignment ID = 1305, Name = SKY E216, S Check assignment in Definition > CPU Devices. CPU Devices Duplicated name within range of CPU Devices ID = 1305, Name = ... ID = 1105, Name = ... Check name in Definition > CPU Devices CPU Devices Duplicated name within range of CPU Devices ID = 1305, Name = ... File MS-Name = ... Close Show that all CPT during operations, available existing name updates only

FIGURE 2-26. SYSTEM CHECK

2.12 DEVICE FINDER

The Device Finder offers the possibility to find all matrices or SNMP boards that are located in the same subnetwork. This is useful, for example, if the IP address of a specific matrix is unknown and should be accessed via IP.

You have the following option to access the function:

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - DEVICE FINDER - 1

The following device information is shown in the Device Finder:

TABLE 2-31. DEVICE INFORMATION

INFORMATION DESCRIPTION
Device Name of device
Name Name of the active configuration
IP Address Current IP address of the device
MAC Address MAC address of the device
Type Type of device

CHAPTER 2: OVERVIEW

NEED HELP? LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7 TECHNICAL SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

NOTE: You can use the last column of the Device Finder to access the respective matrix directly using the Connect button.

To start the Device Finder, proceed as follows:

- Select the symbol Device Finder in the symbol bar.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - CHAPTER 2: OVERVIEW - 1

text_image Device Finder... Available VSM devices within the local network Device Name IP Address Max Address Type 01 TERMA2BCT_ALEX CRED_BX 192.158.158.213 60.21.5F 62.21.5F Name Connect 02 TERMA2BCT_BX_CZ CRED_BX 192.158.158.120 60.21.5F 62.21.5F Name Connect 03 TERMA2BCT_BX_Divera_Gnd_Ref 192.158.158.217 60.21.5F 62.21.5F Name Connect 04 TERMA2BCT_BMX_Divout 192.158.158.214 60.21.5F 62.21.5F Name Connect Refresh Close

FIGURE 2-27. DEVICE FINDER

3.1 PACKAGE CONTENTS

Your package contains the following items:

(1) Modular KVM Matrix Switch
(1) power cord per built-in power supply unit
(1) serial control cable
- Mounting accessories
Java tool
♦ (1) CATx newtork cable (cross-wired)
(1) Quick Start Guide

If anything is missing or damaged, contact Black Box Technical Support at 877-877-2269 or info@blackbox.com.

3.2 SYSTEM SETUP

NOTE: We recommend that first-time users set up the system in the same room as a test setup. This will allow you to identify and solve any cabling problems, and experiment with your system more conveniently.

MATRIX SETUP

  1. Install the CPU and CPU boards.
  2. Connect keyboard, mouse and monitor to the CPU board of the matrix.
  3. Connect the matrix to the power supply.
  4. Open OSD via keyboard command , and log in with administrator rights in the main menu under configuration (see Section 4.2.1).
  5. Configure initially as requested.

NOTE: After you configure the system, we recommend that you save the configuration by selecting Configuration > Save and restart the matrix by selecting Restart Matrix.

  1. Optional: Establish a network connection between the matrix and the Java Tool so you can set an extended configuration (see Section 4.2.2).

The default IP address is 192.168.100.99 and DHCP is deactivated. When installing several matrices at the same time, we strongly recommend that you install them in sequence and to assign unique IP addresses in order to avoid IP address conflicts.

EXTENDER SETUP

  1. Connect the CON Units to the matrix by using the interconnect cables (CATx or fiber).
  2. Connect the CON Units to the input devices to be used (for example, keyboard and mouse).
  3. Connect the 5-VDC power supply units to the CON Units.
  4. Check the basic function of the CON Unit by opening the OSD via keyboard command , .
  5. Connect the source (computer, CPU) to the CPU Unit of the extender using the provided connection cables.
  6. Connect the CPU Unit to the matrix using the interconnect cables (CATx or fiber).

CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION

  1. If you have a video matrix, connect the video source directly to the matrix using the interconnect cables (coax, fiber).
  2. Connect the 5-VDC power supply units to the CPU Units.
  3. Start the system.

3.3 EXAMPLE APPLICATIONS

The Modular KVM Matrix Switch supports a wide and flexible range of system configurations:

A part of the Modular KVM Matrix Switch can be configured as a Single-Head work station, a part as Dual-Head, as Quad-Head or even as a video matrix for example. In addition to that, there are configurations with KVM and USB 2.0 available.

In addition to OSD access by a keyboard connected to the CPU board or and extender CON Unit, other methods of control are available, including:

Java Tool
- Serial interface

A connection to common media controls is also possible.

The following sections show typical example installations of the Modular KVM Matrix Switch.

3.3.1 KVM MATRIX

In Single-Head mode, up to 288 ports can be used either as an input or as an output port depending on components and equipment. Non-blocking access is available for all users, i.e. user access is not limited by the activities of another user.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - KVM MATRIX - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Server 1"] --> B["Server 2"]
    C["Server 3"] --> D["Server 4"]
    E["Server 5"] --> F["Server 5"]
    G["Server 6"] --> H["Computer 1"]
    I["Server 7"] --> J["Server 8"]
    K["Server 9"] --> L["Server 10"]

FIGURE 3-1. KVM MATRIX INSTALLATION EXAMPLE

TABLE 3-1. SINGLE-HEAD KVM MATRIX INSTALLATION COMPONENTS

NUMBER IN FIGURE 3-1 COMPONENT
1 Source (computer, CPU)
2 CPU Unit
3 Interconnect cable
4 Modular KVM Matrix Switch
5 CON Unit
6 Console (monitor, keyboard, mouse)

If you have a Single-Head console, you can also get access to a Dual-Head or Quad-Head console for example. However, control is only possible at monitor 1.

Any signal source can be switched to any number of monitors that will show the video signal at the same time. Audio may also be switched if required.

3.3.2 VIDEO MATRIX

If you use the Modular KVM Matrix Switch as a video matrix, up to 288 input ports can be switched to up to 288 output ports, depending on components and equipment.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - VIDEO MATRIX - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Camera 1"] --> B["Central Device"]
    C["Camera 2"] --> B
    D["Camera 3"] --> B
    E["Camera 4"] --> B
    B --> F["Computer 1"]
    B --> G["Computer 2"]
    B --> H["Computer 3"]
    B --> I["Computer 4"]

FIGURE 3-2. VIDEO MATRIX INSTALLATION EXAMPLE

TABLE 3-2. VIDEO MATRIX INSTALLATION COMPONENTS

NUMBER IN FIGURE 3-2 COMPONENT
1 Video source (e.g., SDI camera)
2 Interconnect cable
3 Modular KVM Matrix Switch
4 Video sink (e.g., monitor)

If you have special configurations, especially at installations with several monitors per workstation or additional support of USB 2.0 transmission paths, the number of connectable CPUs and consoles can be increased by a parallel operation (stacking) of several Modular KVM Matrix Switches.

One Modular KVM Matrix Switch is defined as the Master Matrix and its IP address entered into the Master IP Address field (see Section 4.4.1). All other matrices are defined as Sub Matrices. Sub matrices must be connected to the master matrix via a network connector (RJ-45) on the CPU board. The Enable LAN Echo option has to be activated at the master matrix (see Section 4.4.1).

If a switching command is performed using the OSD, the synchronized matrices will also switch automatically.

NOTE: Switching of stacked devices might be delayed by several seconds.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - VIDEO MATRIX - 2

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Server 1"] --> B["Switch"]
    C["Server 2"] --> D["Switch"]
    E["Server 3"] --> F["Switch"]
    G["Server 4"] --> H["Switch"]
    I["Server 5"] --> J["Switch"]
    K["Server 6"] --> L["Switch"]
    M["Server 7"] --> N["Switch"]
    O["Server 8"] --> P["Switch"]
    B --> Q["Switch"]
    D --> Q
    F --> Q
    H --> Q
    J --> Q
    L --> Q
    N --> Q
    P --> Q
    Q --> R["Computer 1"]
    Q --> S["Computer 2"]
    Q --> T["Computer 3"]
    Q --> U["Computer 4"]
    Q --> V["Computer 5"]
    Q --> W["Computer 6"]

FIGURE 3-3. PARALLEL OPERATION (STACKING) INSTALLATION EXAMPLE

TABLE 3-3. PARALLEL OPERATION (STACKING) INSTALLATION COMPONENTS

NUMBER IN FIGURE 3-3 COMPONENT
1 Dual-Head Source (computer, CPU)
2 CPU Unit
3 Interconnect cable
4 Master matrix
5 Synchronized matrix
6 Network connection master matrix/synchronized matrix
7 CON Unit
8 Console (two monitors, keyboard, mouse)

CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION

3.3.4 MATRIX GRID

You can use a matrix grid for applications where the required number of ports is not sufficient or important connections need to be made to several matrices to provide redundancy.

A matrix grid consists of one master matrix and at least one slave matrix. In its maximum configuration, it can consist of up to 16 matrices.

To build a matrix grid, the grid matrices are interconnected by "Grid Lines." In this case, the slave matrices can be connected directly to the master matrix or between themselves.

When arranging the grid lines, various grid setups can be realized, for example: a ring setup, a hub and spoke setup or a fully connected setup of matrices.

Grid lines can process signals bidirectional (Smart Connect). Per grid line, one KVM connection can be transmitted.

All switching operation will be exclusively performed through the Grid Master.

To configure the matrix grid, see see Section 4.15.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - MATRIX GRID - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    subgraph_Host_Hub["Hub (Grid Master)"]
        A1["CPU Unit"] -->|Spoke| B1["Con Unit"]
        A2["CPU Unit"] -->|Spoke| B2["Con Unit"]
        A3["CPU Unit"] -->|Spoke| B3["Con Unit"]
        A4["CPU Unit"] -->|Spoke| B4["Con Unit"]
        A5["CPU Unit"] -->|Spoke| B5["Con Unit"]
        A6["CPU Unit"] -->|Spoke| B6["Con Unit"]
        A7["CPU Unit"] -->|Spoke| B7["Con Unit"]
        A8["CPU Unit"] -->|Spoke| B8["Con Unit"]
        A9["CPU Unit"] -->|Spoke| B9["Con Unit"]
        A10["CPU Unit"] -->|Spoke| B10["Con Unit"]
        A11["CPU Unit"] -->|Spoke| B11["Con Unit"]
        A12["CPU Unit"] -->|Spoke| B12["Con Unit"]
        A13["CPU Unit"] -->|Spoke| B13["Con Unit"]
        A14["CPU Unit"] -->|Spoke| B14["Con Unit"]
        A15["CPU Unit"] -->|Spoke| B15["Con Unit"]
        A16["CPU Unit"] -->|Spoke| B16["Con Unit"]
        A17["CPU Unit"] -->|Spoke| B17["Con Unit"]
        A18["CPU Unit"] -->|Spoke| B18["Con Unit"]
        A19["CPU Unit"] -->|Spoke| B19["Con Unit"]
        A20["CPU Unit"] -->|Spoke| B20["Con Unit"]
    end
    style Host_Hub fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Host_Hub_Acc fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style Host_Hub_Acc_Ucc fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style Host_Hub_Acc_Ucc_Ucc fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style Host_Hub_Acc_Ucc_Ucc_Ucc fill:#cff,stroke:#333

FIGURE 3-4. MATRIX GRID INSTALLATION EXAMPLE

4.1 COMMAND MODE

The Modular KVM Matrix Switch includes a Command Mode that allows several functions to be controlled by keyboard commands during normal use.

To enter Command Mode, use a Hotkey sequence, and to exit Command Mode, press . While in Command Mode, the Shift and Scroll LEDs on the console keyboard will flash.

NOTE: In Command Mode, normal keyboard and mouse operation will cease. Only selected keyboard commands are available. If there is no keyboard command executed within 10 seconds after activating Command Mode, it will be deactivated automatically.

The following table lists the keyboard commands to enter and to exit Command Mode and to change the Hotkey sequence.

TABLE 4-1. KEYBOARD COMMANDS

FUNCTION KEYBOARD COMMAND
Enter Command Mode (default) 2x(or Hotkey)
Exit Command Mode
Change Hotkey Sequence, , , Until 2011-30-09:+ , ,

NOTE:

+ Press keys simultaneously

, Press keys successively

2x Press key quickly, twice in a row (similar to a mouse double-click)

The Hotkey sequence to enter Command Mode can be changed. The following table lists the Hotkey Codes for the available key sequences:

TABLE 4-2. HOTKEY CODES AND KEY SEQUENCES

HOTKEY CODE HOTKEY
0 Freely selectable (from 2012-01-12 on)
2 2x
3 2x
4 2x
5 2x
6 2x
7 2x
8 2x

NOTE: In a combined KVM matrix / U-Switch configuration, choose different Hotkeys for the KVM matrix and the U-Switch.

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

SET FREELY SELECTABLE HOTKEY (EXAMPLE)

To set a freely selectable Hotkey (e.g. 2x ), use the following keyboard sequence:

, , <0>, ,

SET HOTKEY FOR DIRECT OSD ACCESS

Next to the Hotkey for standard functions, this Hotkey can be exclusively used for opening the OSD directly.

To select a Hotkey from the Hotkey table for a direct opening of the OSD, use the following keyboard sequence:

, , ,

To select a freely selectable Hotkey (e.g. 2x ) for opening OSD directly, use the following keyboard sequence:

, , <0>, ,

RESET HOTKEY

To set a Hotkey back to default settings of the extender, press the key combination + within 5 seconds after switching on the CON Unit or plugging in a keyboard.

To delete the Hotkey for direct OSD access, use the following keyboard sequence:

, , <0>, ,

4.2 CONTROL OPTIONS

The Modular KVM Matrix Switch contains an internal CPU that allows you to control all functions from any console without the need for an external CPU or media control.

You have the following options to access the Modular KVM Matrix Switch for configuration and operation:

via OSD
- via Java Tool
- via serial interface

4.2.1 CONTROL VIA OSD

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - CONTROL VIA OSD - 1

Via OSD (On-Screen-Display), you set the configuration of the Modular KVM Matrix Switch operating system. The settings of the Configuration menu are described below. All other menus are described in later chapters.

You have the following options to enter the OSD of the Modular KVM Matrix Switch:

  • via keyboard connected to the CPU board
  • via keyboard connected to a CON Unit of an extender

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

NEED HELP?

LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7

TECHNICAL

SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

ENTERING OSD

  1. Start Command Mode with the Hotkey (see Section 4.1).
  2. Press to open OSD. You will see a list of all available CPUs as a start menu.
  3. Press to enter the main menu.

NOTE: If the Enable CPU Selection option is enabled in the Configuration menu, the selection list for switching CPU devices will be opened initially. To skip this list, press the key.

LEAVING OSD

Press in the main menu or simultaneously + anywhere within the OSD.

The OSD will be closed without any further changes and the currently active CPU connection will be displayed.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - MENU STRUCTURE - 1

text_image 03000 CUN 010123614 ESC:Login/Logout Menu Switch Status Configuration About ... Shift+ESC = Close SWITCH 01

FIGURE 4-1. EXAMPLE VIEW

The general layout of the OSD is structured into three areas:

♦ Upper status area (topmost two text lines)
- Working area
♦ Lower status area (lowest two text lines)

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

NEED HELP?

LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7

TECHNICAL

SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

KEYBOARD CONTROL

You can select the following keyboard commands.

TABLE 4-3. KEYBOARD COMMANDS

FUNCTION KEYBOARD COMMAND
Left cursor - only within an input field or a switching screen
Right cursor - only within an input field or a switching screen
In input fields: Line up (with wrap around)
In menus: Line up (without wrap around)
In input fields: Line down (with wrap around)
In menus: Line down (without wrap around)
Previous page in menus with more than one page
Next page in menus with more than one page
Next input field
Previous input field+
Next option in selection fields<->
Previous option in selection fields<->
Switching in selection fields between two conditions, e. g. between ON / OFF or Y (Yes) / N (No)
In menus with input fields: Save data
In menus: Select menu item
In menus with input fields: Cancel data input without saving
In menus with selection fields: Go back to the superior menu

SORTING FUNCTION

Lists and tables in the Java Tool offer a sorting function for fast and smooth search.

The following sorting functions are available.

TABLE 4-4. SORTING FUNCTIONS

FUNCTIONKEYBOARD COMMAND
Sort ID numbers in descending order by pressing the keyboard command once.Sort ID numbers in ascending order by pressing the keyboard command twice (ID).
Sort ID names in descending order by pressing the keyboard command once.Sort ID names in ascending order by pressing the keyboard command twice (Name).
Go to the next result in the list of results of the search field (Next).
Go to the previous result in the list of results of the search field (Previous).
Refresh the currently shown list (Refresh).
Jump between the search field and the list of results (Find).

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

NEED HELP? LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7 TECHNICAL SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

PASSWORD REQUEST

You have to login with administrator rights to be able to set configurations.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - PASSWORD REQUEST - 1

text_image 03000 CON 010123614 Login User Password Cancel Okay SWITCH 01

FIGURE 4-2. LOGIN

Access to the configuration menu requires administrator rights. User login is mandatory.

TABLE 4-5. LOGIN

FIELD INPUT
User admin
Password admin

By pressing in the main menu of the OSD, the login mask will be opened. To log out a user, press again.

For security reasons, please change the administrator password as soon as possible (see Section 4.4.1).

4.2.2 CONTROL VIA JAVA TOOL

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - CONTROL VIA JAVA TOOL - 1

REQUIREMENTS

If you want to use the Java Tool, you will need:

◆ Computer with an executable Java Tool and an installed Java Runtime Environment (JRE, version 1.7 or higher)

  • Java Tool software
    ◆ Available network connection between the Java Tool and the matrix

NOTE: Contact your system administrator concerning JRE and network connection.

INSTALLATION OF THE JAVA TOOL

The Java Tool is available as a single executable program file that does not require a separate installation.

- Copy the tool after receiving the file to a directory on your computer.

NOTE: If you do not have a copy of the Java Tool, contact Black Box Technical Support at 877-877-2269 or info@blackbox.com.

COMPUTER CONNECTION TO THE MATRIX

For a direct connection between computer and matrix, a cross-wired network cable is required.

For a connection between computer and matrix via switch or hub, a parallel assembled network cable is required.

Do not use a network connection between Java Tool and the matrix that is primarily used for transmitting audio data.

- Connect the network cable to the RJ-45 ports of computer and CPU board of the matrix.

START OF THE JAVA TOOL

- Open the Java Tool by double-clicking on the program icon or press the key of the keyboard.

CONNECTION TO THE MATRIX

NOTE: At least FTP rights are required.

  1. Open the Java Tool.
  2. Select Matrix > Connect in the menu bar.
  3. Enter the IP address in the popup input field according to the network configuration of the Modular KVM Matrix Switch (see Section 4.2.3).
  4. Enter the user name and password for the Modular KVM Matrix Switch (see Section 4.4.1).
  5. Confirm your inputs with the OK button or reject with Cancel.

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

NEED HELP? LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7 TECHNICAL SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION - 1

text_image Connect Host Name / IP Address 192.168.100.217 Name admin Password ******** OK Cancel

FIGURE 4-3. CONNECT

NOTE: Up to twelve connections between the matrix and the Java Tool can be established at the same time due to a limitation of available sockets.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION - 2

text_image File Edit Device Editor Open... Save Recent Connect Disconnect Activate Online Configuration Save Online Changes Download... Upload Monitoring Report Device Finder System Check Save Status... General Automatic ISO System - System Data Device Name Info Sub Matrix Load Default Auto Save Enable COM Echo Enable LAW Echo Enable Redundancy Synchrotronics Echo Only Master IP Address Imable ISO Research August 2011 August 2011 Name of Current Matrix configuration 141136 Description of current matrix configurations Advice History controls the uncorrected networkreach When performing a card asset or a related of the matrix, the configuration set is Default and is always activated Save matrix value automatically Echo all switch commands via communication units Echo all switch commands via LHP ports Echo automatic positioning the controller shareholders Synchrotronics matrix with master address Synchrotronics matrix with master ring Set the network address of the master matrix Unadjusted in LHP during operation, enable during matrix settings ring

FIGURE 4-4. SYSTEM—SYSTEM DATA

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

NEED HELP?

LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7

TECHNICAL

SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

The menu structure of the Java Tool is subdivided into various sections:

  • Menu bar (top line)
  • Toolbar (second line)
    Tab bar (third line)
    ◆ Task area (left menu section)
  • Working area (right menu section)
  • Status bar (bottom line section)

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

The operation of the Java Tool is intuitive and corresponds to the user interface of common operating systems.

The Java Tool contains its own support function.

The integrated help texts in the working area of the Java Tool can be activated or deactivated by the checkbox in the upper right corner.

MOUSE CONTROL

You can select the following mouse commands.

TABLE 4-6. MOUSE COMMANDS

FUNCTION MOUSE COMMAND
Menu selection, marking Left mouse button
Open function-specific selection menus Double-click left mouse button
Open context-specific selection menus Right mouse button

KEYBOARD CONTROL

You can select the following keyboard commands.

TABLE 4-7. KEYBOARD COMMANDS

FUNCTION MOUSE COMMAND
Cursor to the left
Cursor to the right
Line up
Line down
Previous page in input or status menus with more than one page
Next page in input or status menus with more than one page
Next field in input menus
Previous field in input menus+

TABLE 4-7 (CONTINUED). KEYBOARD COMMANDS

FUNCTION MOUSE COMMAND
Switching in selection fields between two conditions (checkmark or not).Open already marked fields with editing or selecting possibility.
In menus: Data savingMenu item selection
Leave tablesJump from tables into the next field+
Leave tablesJump from tables into the previous field+ +

NOTE: Various functions within the menus in the menu bar can be executed with the provided keyboard commands (e.g. press + to execute Save) that are listed to the right of the respective menu item.

RELOAD OPTIONS

The information shown in the Java Tool can be reloaded in different ways.

  • Via on the keyboard used
  • Via Edit > Reload in the menu bar
  • Via "Reload" Symbol in the symbol bar

CONTEXT FUNCTION

The Java Tool offers several context functions that support user-friendly and effective operation. The context functions are described in the respective chapters.

- To execute a context function, use the right mouse button on the corresponding field and select the desired function.

SORTING FUNCTION

Lists and tables in the Java Tool offer a sorting function for fast and smooth search.

  1. Ascending: Click left mouse button once on the header of the column to be sorted. The sort status is indicated by an arrow that points upwards.
  2. Descending: Click left mouse button once on the header of the column to be sorted. The sort is displayed by an arrow that points downwards.
  3. Cancel sort: Click left mouse button once or twice on the head of the sorted column. The arrow displayed disappears.

FILTER FUNCTION

Lists and tables in the Java Tool offer a filter function that allows a fast and smooth search.

  1. To activate a filter, use the right mouse button to click on the header of the column to be filtered and select Set Filter.
  2. Write the word or part of a word that has to be filtered into the header. The filter results are shown immediately.
  3. To delete a filter, use the right mouse button to click on the header of the column that has to be filtered and select Clear Filter.

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

NEED HELP? LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7 TECHNICAL SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

NOTE: An active filter is indicated by an asterisk in the header.

The filter function is based on the functional principle of common web search engines.

Configuration and system settings via Java Tool can be changed in offline mode without a direct connection between matrix and Java Tool.

To activate a matrix configuration, proceed as follows:

  1. Select File > Upload in the menu bar.
  2. Enter the IP address of the matrix (see Section 4.2.3) and the name and password of the user authorization and select the storage location of the new configuration (default or config01-08) in the Select Configuration menu.
  3. Select Matrix > Connect in the menu bar and enter the IP address of the matrix and the name and password for user authorization.
  4. Select Administration > Activate Configuration in the task area and select the storage location that has been selected above.
  5. Use the Activate button to open the selected configuration within the matrix.

The connection and the open tab will be closed and the matrix will be restarted.

NOTE During the activation of a configuration, the matrix is temporarily unavailable.

Configurations and system settings can be also edited via Java Tool in online mode with an active connection between matrix and Java Tool.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION - 1

text_image File Edit Devices Options Open Save Refresh Connect Disconnect Diachrate Online Configuration Save Online Changes Download Upload Monitoring Report Device Finder System Check Save Status JF 2019300063205_Respect1.doc Status Control Administration Assignment System System Data Access Switch Network Date and Time Make Grid Definition System - System Data General Automatic ID Device Respect1 Name Respect1 Info 141128 Descriptor of current-Items-configuration Sub-Matrix Active: Inship monitoring uncompleted adjustment Load Default Active performing a cell effect in a protocol of this matrix, the configuration closed to Load will be provided activated Auto Save Save remote status automated) Enable COM Echo Delete of switch commands site connection parts Enable LAM Echo Delete of switch commands site LAM parts Enable Redundancy Enable auxiliary switching for refundated parameters Synchrony Synchrony lists with master matrix Echo Only Synchrony appears with adjacency Monitor IP Address: Set the relevant address of the master matrix Ready HCI Boards Show Configuration Mode Activated Show Help

FIGURE 4-5. SYSTEM—SYSTEM DATA

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

To edit a configuration in online mode, proceed as follows:

  1. Select the menu item Matrix > Activate Online Configuration Mode. This setting will also be shown in the lower part of the working area.
  2. Make any edits at the configuration and system settings and confirm them by pressing the Apply button. The changes will be applied immediately.
  3. To deactivate the online mode, select the menu item Matrix > Deactivate Online Configuration Mode in the menu bar.

On newer firmware, you will need to enable the Java Tool using the local OSD from a receiver by logging into the Configuration Menu as admin, and go to System options. You will then find a setting to allow Java communication. Save the settings and the Java tool will be able to work using the Online Configuration Mode.

OPTIONS MENU

The Java Tool can be adapted and customized by editing various default settings.

To activate or change the default settings, proceed as follows:

- Select Extras > Options in the menu bar. The Default Settings tab will open.

The following default settings parameters can be changed.

TABLE 4-8. DEFAULT SETTINGS PARAMETERS OPTIONS

OPTION DESCRIPTION
IP / Hostname Default IP address of the matrix required for connection
User Default user name required for connection
Configuration Directory Default directory for configuration files
Firmware Directory Default directory for update files
Status Directory Default directory for the firmware status
Import / Export DirectoryDefault directory for import and export files
Presets DirectoryDefault directory for macro files

To set various font sizes for the Java Tool, proceed as follows:

  1. Select Extras > Options in the menu bar.
  2. Open the Font tab.
  3. Select the desired font size (normal or large).

REPORT

The Java Tool is equipped with a report function that shows the current switching status and all relevant parts of the matrix configuration in a PDF file.

To create a report, proceed as follows:

  1. Select File > Report... in the menu bar. A selection assistant will be opened.
  2. Select contents that should be included in the report (Matrix View, EXT Units, CPU Devices, CON Devices and Users) and confirm with the Next > button.
  3. Select the preferred location for storage of the report and confirm with the Finish button.

The report will be created as a PDF file.

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

NEED HELP? LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7 TECHNICAL SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION - 1

text_image On - Self-Device Echo 1 Open... Save Record Connect Unconfirmed Activate Online Configuration Save Online Changes Download... Upload... Monitoring Report... Device Finder... System Check... Save Status... 2019CONSENSION figure1.jpg Status Control Administration Assignment System Definition System - System Data General Automatic ID Device Name Info Sub Matrix Load Default Auto Save Enable COM Echo Enable LAIR Echo Enable Reusband Spectrumsis Echo Only Master IP Address Insured IO Boards Configuration Report? Steps 1. Define Context 2. Save Report Define Context Water View System Assignment EXT Units GPU Devices CON Devices Access Control Favorites Macros User Access Control Favorites Macros Select All Subsystem rights with active only Set the network address of the master reality Standard be IPT during operation, enable timing records, update only

FIGURE 4-6. REPORT

NOTE: The report function can be used in both online or offline mode of the Java Tool.

4.2.3 CONTROL VIA SERIAL INTERFACE

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - CONTROL VIA SERIAL INTERFACE - 1

The Modular KVM Matrix Switch operating system offers various functions for operation via a serial interface. There are telegrams for switching single or all connections available, both unidirectional and bidirectional. In addition, there are telegrams for an overall definition of the total switching status and for saving and loading such switching states.

The Modular KVM Matrix Switch optionally provides an echo of all affected switching operations via a serial interface or a network interface. This aids continuous tracking of a matrix configuration and enables your own applications to be updated.

As an additional application, you can switch matrix clones in parallel as synchronized matrices (Stacking) via a serial network interface.

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

NEED HELP?

LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7

TECHNICAL

SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

4.3 ASSIGNMENT

The Modular KVM Matrix Switch offers the option of a console-specific or a CPU-specific assignment.

  • Assign virtual CPUs to real CPUs.
  • Assign real consoles to virtual consoles.

4.3.1 VIRTUAL CPU

You can assign virtual to real CPUs in this menu.

With this function, the effort of switching several consoles to the same CPU can be reduced. If several consoles are connected to a virtual CPU that is assigned to a real CPU, you only have to change the real CPU once and all consoles will receive the video signal of the new CPU.

You have the following options to access the menu:

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - VIRTUAL CPU - 1

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - VIRTUAL CPU - 2

OSD

- Select Assignments > Virtual CPU Devices in the main menu.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - OSD - 1

text_image 03000 CON 010125062 - admin Virtual CPU devices F1:ID F2:Name F3:Next F4:Previous F5:Refresh F6:Find ESC Virtual Devices 02000 VCPU_02000 01005 MAC_04 ANR 02001 VCPU_02001 02002 VCPU_02002 01006 CPU_08 Real Devices 01007 CPU_07 01004 MAC_01_DWD_USB 01001 MAC_02_DAD_HID 01003 MAC_03_ANR_HID 01002 WIN/UBU_05_USB 01000 WIN/UBU_06_USB Edit Delete Cancel OK

FIGURE 4-7. VIRTUAL CPU DEVICES

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

NEED HELP? LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7 TECHNICAL SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

For an assignment, proceed as follows:

  1. Select the virtual CPU in the Virtual Devices list that has to be assigned to a real CPU.
  2. Press the Edit button.
  3. Select the CPU in the Real Devices list that has to be assigned to the selected virtual CPU.
  4. Press the Okay button to confirm the assignment.

The assignment will be made.

NOTE: Only one virtual CPU can be assigned to a real CPU.

JAVA TOOL

- Select Assignments > Virtual CPU Devices in the task area.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - JAVA TOOL - 1

text_image File Edit Device Options Open... Save Record Correct Document Activate Online Configuration Save Online Changes Discover. Upload. Monitoring Report Device Finder System Check Save Status 2015000000000_Import13p: C Status Control Administration Assignment Virtual CPU Devices Virtual CDN Devices Multi-Sheet Control System Definition Assignment - Virtual CPU Devices Virtual CPU Name Real CPU Name 01141 OFF-PC 113-DV1 01142 OFF-PC 112 01143 OFF-PC 113 01144 OFF-PC 114 01145 OFF-PC 115-DV1 01146 OFF-PC 116 01147 OFF-PC 117 01148 OFF-PC 118 01149 OFF-PC 119 01150 OFF-PC 120 01151 OFF-PC 121 01152 OFF-PC 122 01153 OFF-PC 123 01154 OFF-PC 124 01155 OFF-PC 125 01156 OFF-PC 126 01157 OFF-PC 127 01158 OFF-PC 128 01159 OFF-PC 129 01160 OFF-PC 130 01161 OFF-PC 131 01162 OFF-PC 132 01163 OFF-PC 133 01164 OFF-PC 134 01165 OFF-PC 135 01166 OFF-PC 136 01167 OFF-PC 137 01168 OFF-PC 138 01169 OFF-PC 139 01170 OFF-PC 140 01171 OFF-PC 141 01172 OFF-PC 142 01173 OFF-PC 143 01174 OFF-PC 144 01175 OFF-PC 145 01176 OFF-PC 146 01177 OFF-PC 147 Auto Stand

FIGURE 4-8. VIRTUAL CPU DEVICES

For an assignment, proceed as follows:

  1. Select a virtual CPU in the Virtual CPU list.
  2. Double-click in the Real CPU column to display a list of all available real CPUs.
  3. Select a real CPU.
    You can select the following buttons.

TABLE 4-9. BUTTONS

BUTTON FUNCTION
Send Send assignments to the matrix
Reload Reload changes

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

NOTE: When the Auto Send function in the left lower corner of the work area is ticked, switching operations will be completed immediately without user confirmation via the Send button.

The selection boxes in the Real CPU column contain a filter function for easy selection of a single CPU from a larger pool of CPUs (see Section 4.2.2).

The Java tool offers the option to switch directly from the Assignment menu to the Definition menu to check specific settings for the respective console or CPU.

- Use the right mouse button to select the respective console or CPU and select Open CON Device or Open CPU Device.

4.3.2 VIRTUAL CONSOLE

You can assign real consoles to virtual consoles in this menu.

This function reflects changes in permission made to virtual consoles onto real consoles.

Virtual consoles can be switched in the same way as real consoles. Real consoles that are assigned to a virtual console that is connected to a CPU will receive the video signal. The last-assigned console will also have control of the keyboard and mouse.

You have the following options to access the menu:

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - VIRTUAL CONSOLE - 1

text_image OSD JAVA

OSD

- Select Assignments > Virtual CON Devices in the main menu.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - OSD - 1

text_image 03008 CON_010125462 - admin Virtual CON devices E1:10 F2:Name F3:Next F4:Previous F5:Refresh F6:Find ESC Real Devices 03006 CON_010123491 04000 VCON_04000 03000 CON_010125062 03002 CON_010125349 04000 VCON_04000 03001 CON_010125524 03004 CON_010129565 03005 CON_010129653 04001 VCON_04001 03003 CON_010148887 Virtual Devices 04008 VCON_04008 04001 VCON_04001 04002 VCON_04002 Edit Delete Enter Obay SWITCH 81

FIGURE 4-9. VIRTUAL CON DEVICES

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

NEED HELP? LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7 TECHNICAL SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

For an assignment, proceed as follows:

  1. Select the real console in the Real Devices list that has to be assigned to a virtual CPU.
  2. Press the Edit button.
  3. Select the virtual console in the Virtual Devices list that has to be assigned to the selected real console.
  4. Press the Okay button to confirm the assignment. The assignment will be made.

NOTE: A virtual console can be assigned to more than one real console.

JAVA TOOL

- Select Assignments > Virtual CON Devices in the task area.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - JAVA TOOL - 1

text_image Open - Save - Reset - Connect - Connect - Adjust Online Configuration - Save Online Changes - Download - Upload - Monitoring - Report - Device Finder - System Check - Save Status 20160308200_Report11ap - C: Assignment - Virtual CON Devices Control Administration Assignment Virtual CPU Devices Virtual CON Centers Multi-Screen Control System Definition Assign - Virtual CON Devices Real Console Name Virtual Console Name ID Graflaser 2 Graflaser 3 Graflaser 4 Graflaser 5 Graflaser 6 Graflaser 7 Graflaser 8 Graflaser 9 Graflaser 10 Graflaser 11 Graflaser 12 Graflaser 13 Graflaser 14 Graflaser 15 Graflaser 16 Graflaser 17 Graflaser 18 Graflaser 19 Graflaser 20 Graflaser 21 Graflaser 22 Graflaser 23 Graflaser 24 Graflaser 25 Graflaser 26 Graflaser 27 Graflaser 28 Graflaser 29 Graflaser 30 Graflaser 31 Graflaser 32 Graflaser 33 Graflaser 34 Graflaser 35 Graflaser 36 Graflaser 37 Graflaser 38 Graflaser 39 Graflaser 40 Graflaser 41 Graflaser 42 Graflaser 43 Graflaser 44 Graflaser 45 Graflaser 46 Graflaser 47 Graflaser 48 Graflaser 49 Graflaser 50 Graflaser 51 Graflaser 52 Graflaser 53 Graflaser 54 Graflaser 55 Graflaser 56 Graflaser 57 Graflaser 58 Graflaser 59 Graflaser 60 Graflaser 61 Graflaser 62 Graflaser 63 Graflaser 64 Graflaser 65 Graflaser 66 Graflaser 67 Graflaser 68 Graflaser 69 Graflaser 70 Graflaser 71 Graflaser 72 Graflaser 73 Graflaser 74 Graflaser 75 Graflaser 76 Graflaser 77 Graflaser 78 Graflaser 79 Graflaser 80 Graflaser 81 Graflaser 82 Graflaser 83 Graflaser 84 Graflaser 85 Graflaser 86 Graflaser 87 Graflaser 88 Graflaser 89 Graflaser 90 Graflaser 91 Graflaser 92 Graflaser 93 Graflaser 94 Graflaser 95 Graflaser 96 Graflaser 97 Graflaser 98 Graflaser 99 Graflaser 100

FIGURE 4-10. VIRTUAL CON DEVICES

To place an assignment, proceed as follows:

  1. Select the required real console in the Real Console table.
  2. Double-click in the Virtual Console column to display a list of all available virtual consoles.
  3. Select the required virtual console.
    You can select the following buttons:

TABLE 4-10. BUTTONS

BUTTON FUNCTION
Send Send assignments to the matrix
Cancel Reject changes

NOTE: When the Auto Send function in the lower left corner of the work area is ticked, switching operations will be completed immediately without user confirmation via the Send button.

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

NEED HELP?

LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7

TECHNICAL

SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

The selection boxes in the Virtual Console column contain a filter function for easy selection of a single CON from a larger pool of CON devices (see Chapter 4.2.2).

4.4 SYSTEM SETTINGS

You have the option to configure the system settings of the Modular KVM Matrix Switch.

- The configuration of the system settings can only be done by users with administrator rights.

4.4.1 SYSTEM DATA

The system configuration is set in this menu.

You have the following options to access the menu.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - SYSTEM DATA - 1

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - SYSTEM DATA - 2

You can select the following settings.

TABLE 4-11. SYSTEM DATA SETTINGS

FIELD SELECTION DESCRIPTION
Device TextEnter the device name of the matrix (default: SWITCH_01)
Name TextEnter the name of the configuration that is used to save the current settings (default: Standard)
Info TextAdditional text field to describe the configuration (default: Factory settings)
Sub MatrixactivatedIf the matrix is defined as a sub matrix in the OSD, the user will lose control. Control can be recovered by using the keyboard command,,<o>. The OSD for the matrix that has been defined as a sub matrix will be reopened.
deactivatedFunction not active (default)
Load DefaultactivatedStarting the matrix after a restart or a switch-on with the default configuration
deactivatedStarting the matrix after a restart or a switch-on with the last saved configuration (default).
Auto SaveactivatedSave the current configuration of the matrix in the flash memory periodically. NOTE: During the save operation, the matrix will not operate. Saving takes place every 600 seconds, as long as changes of the configuration or switching operations have been executed in the meantime.
deactivatedFunction not active (default)
FIELD SELECTION DESCRIPTION
Enable COM EchoactivatedSend all switching commands performed in the matrix as an echo via serial interface. NOTE: This function should be enabled when using a media control via serial interface.
deactivated Function not active (default)
Enable LAN EchoactivatedSend all switching commands performed in the matrix as an echo via LAN connection. NOTE: This function should be enabled when using a media control via LAN connection or when using stacking with two ore more matrices.
deactivated Function not active (default)
Enable RedundancyactivatedAutomatically switch to the second link of a connected redundant CON Unit when losing the primary link of a CPU Unit (default). NOTE: This function will have to be activated for both matrices in a fully redundant setup.
deactivated Function not active
Synchronizeactivated Synchronize the slave matrix to the switch status of the master matrix.
deactivated Function not active (default)
Echo OnlyactivatedSynchronize the matrix according to the echo of a second matrix. NOTE: This is a bidirectional synchronization where both matrices have to be configured as Synchronize with the Master IP of the respective other matrix.
deactivated Function not active (default)
Master IP AddressNumerical valueSet the network address of the master matrix (default value: 000.000.000.000)
Invalid IO-BoardsactivatedKeep I/O boards with incorrect or invalid firmware online in the matrix. NOTE: To keep an I/O board with wrong or damaged firmware online in the matrix, the maintenance mode of the matrix will be activated.
deactivatedShut down I/O boards with incorrect or invalid firmware automatically (default).
Hor. Mouse Speed 1/x1-9Adjustment of the horizontal mouse speed, 1 = slow, 9 = fast (default value: 4)
Ver. Mouse Speed 1/x1-9Adjustment of the vertical mouse speed, 1 = slow, 9 = fast (default value: 5)
Double Click Time100-800Adjustment of the time slot for a double-click (default value: 200 ms)
Keyboard layoutRegionSet the OSD keyboard layout according to the keyboard used (default: German (DE))

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

NEED HELP?

LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7

TECHNICAL

SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

OSD

- Select Configuration > System in the main menu.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - OSD - 1

text_image odair@CON 010167832 Configuration ESQ System Device : SWITCH 01 Name : Standard Info : Factory settings Sub Matrix : N Load Default : N Auto Save : N Enable COM Echo : N Enable LAN Echo : N Enable Redundancy : V Synchronize : N Echo Only : N Master IP Address : 000 000 000 000 Enable Auto Config : V ID Real CPU Device : 1001 ID Virt. CPU Device : 2001 ID Real CON Device : 3001 ID Virt. CON Device : 4001 Invalid ID-Boards : N Enable old Eches : N (hall case for network environment) Name of current matrix configuration Below Hotkey control in cancelled environment Load Slamps default configuration Have matrix status automatically Echo all switch commands via COM port is Echo all switch commands via IAN port is Enable automatic switching for embankull refunders Combination matrix with master matrix Combination matrix with echo only Reset new adapter to a new CPU or ON unit. Start ID for automatic adjustment of real CPU devices Start ID for automatic adjustment of virtual CPU devices Start ID for automatic adjustment of real ON devices Start ID for automatic adjustment of virtual ON devices Keep IP-Boards with invalid firmware online for update Echo internal switch commands with old hardware OSD Data CPU Horizontal mouse speed [1/x]: 4 Vertical mouse speed [1/x]: 5 Double click time [ms]: 200 Keyboard layout : German DE.129 Cancel Okay SWITCH 01

FIGURE 4-11. CONFIGURATION—SYSTEM

You can select the following buttons.

TABLE 4-12. BUTTONS

BUTTON FUNCTION
Cancel Reject changes
Save Save changes

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

NEED HELP? LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7 TECHNICAL SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

JAVA TOOL

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION - 1

text_image File Edit Device Echo 2 Open Save Retired Connect Connect Active Online Configuration Save Online Changes Download Upload Monitoring Report Device Finder System Check Save Status 2015/00/06/2005_Report Data Status Control Administration Assignment System System Data Access Switch Network Data and Time Matrix Grid Definition System - System Data General Automatic ID Device Bogart1 Name: Bogart1 Name of virtual matrix configuration Info: Description of virtual matrix configuration Sub Matrix: Auto Tokey (accessed associated environment) Load Default: When performing a virtualist as a model of the matrix, the configuration allows to default within the active command) Auto Save: Save matrix status automatically Enable COM Echo Extra-art switch community via communication points Enable LKB Echo Extra-art switch community via LKB point Enable Multifordancy Enable automatic matching the multiford parameters Syncrounce Syncrounce matrix with master matrix Echo Only Syncrounce matrix with active only Master IP Address Set the network address of the master matrix Insolid IO Guards Insolidable to TCP during generation, private during matrix download only Config returned

FIGURE 4-12. SYSTEM DATA

4.4.2 AUTOMATIC ID

Settings for automatic creation of CPU and CON Devices when a new extender unit is connected are made in this menu. You have the following options to access the menu.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - AUTOMATIC ID - 1

text_image OSD JAVA

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

NEED HELP? LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7 TECHNICAL SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

You can select the following settings.

TABLE 4-13. AUTOMATIC ID SETTINGS

FIELD SELECTION DESCRIPTION
Enable Auto ConfigactivatedAutomatic creation of a new CPU or CON Device if new extender units are connected (default)
deactivated Function not active
ID Real CPU DeviceNumerical valueInitial value of the automatic ID for real CPUs (default value: 1000)
ID Virtual CPU DeviceNumerical valueInitial value of the automatic ID for virtual CPUs (default value: 2000)
ID Real CON DeviceNumerical valueInitial value of the automatic ID for real CONs (default value: 3000)
ID Virtual CON DeviceNumerical valueInitial value of the automatic ID for virtual CONs (default value: 4000)

OSD

- Select Configuration > System in the main menu.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - OSD - 1

text_image Device : SWITCH 01 Name : Standard Info : Factory settings Sub Matrix : N (above buskey control in cascaded environment) Load Default : N (real always default configuration) Auto Save : N (base matrix status automatically) Enable COM Echo : N (echo all valid commands via COM ports) Enable LAN Echo : N (echo all valid commands via LAN ports) Enable Redundancy : V (enable automatic switching for redundant conductors) Synchronize : N (synchronous matrix with master matrix) Echo Only : N (synchronous matrix with echo only) Master IP Address : 000 000 000 000 Enable Auto Config : V (assign new estimator to a new CPU or COM unit) ID Real CPU Device : 1001 Start ID for automatic assignment of virtual CPU devices ID Virt. CPU Device : 2001 Start ID for automatic assignment of virtual CPU devices ID Real CON Device : 3001 Start ID for automatic assignment of virtual CON devices ID Virt. CON Device : 4001 Start ID for automatic assignment of virtual CON devices Invalid IO-Boards : N Keep ID-Boards with invalid firmware value for update Enable old Echo : N echo internal switch commands will old format OSD Data CPU Horizontal mouse speed II/xl: 4 Vertical mouse speed II/xl: 5 Double click time [msl: 200 Keyboard layout : German DE.129 Cancel Okay SWITCH 01

FIGURE 4-13. CONFIGURATION—SYSTEM

You can select the following buttons.

TABLE 4-14. BUTTONS

BUTTONFUNCTION
CancelReject changes
SaveSave changes

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

NEED HELP?

LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7

TECHNICAL

SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

JAVA TOOL

- Select the Automatic ID tab in System > System Data.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - JAVA TOOL - 1

text_image File Edit Device Options Down - Save Rollout Connect Document Adjusted Online Configuration Save Online Changes Download Upload Monitoring Report Device Finder System Check Save Status 2019080540001_Regret11.jsp System - System Data General Automatic ID Enable Auto Config Design new TCP and its new CTR or COM device ID Real CPU Device Start ID for automatic assignment of real CPU devices ID Virtual CPU Device Start ID for automatic assignment of virtual CPU devices ID Real COM Device Start ID for automatic assignment of real COM devices ID Virtual COM Device Start ID for automatic assignment of virtual COM devices Definition Show Help

FIGURE 4-14. SYSTEM-AUTOMATIC ID

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

NEED HELP?

LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7

TECHNICAL

SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

4.4.3 ACCESS

The access configuration is set in this menu.

You have the following options to access the menu.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - ACCESS - 1

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - ACCESS - 2

You can select the following settings.

TABLE 4-15. ACCESS SETTINGS

FIELD SELECTION DESCRIPTION
Force User LoginactivatedThe user has to login with a user name and a password once to enter the OSD. The user remains logged in until he explicitly logs out or an auto logout occurs. NOTE: When using the Force User Login function, console favorites and console macros still remain active.
deactivated Function not active (default)
Enable User ACLactivatedCPU access is restricted according to the permissions in the ACL (Access Control List).User login is required.Switching by keyboard Hotkeys requires a prior login.
deactivated Function not active (default)
Enable Console ACLactivatedCPU access is restricted according to the permissions in the respective Console ACL (Access Control List). No login required.
deactivated Function not active
Enable new Useractivated Newly created users automatically receive access to all CPUs
deactivated Function not active (default)
Enable new CONactivated Newly created CON Devices automatically receive access to all CPUs
deactivated Function not active (default)
Auto DisconnectactivatedUpon opening the OSD, the console will be automatically disconnected from the current CPU.
deactivated Function not active (default)
OSD Timeout 0-999 secondsPeriod of inactivity after which OSD will be closed automatically.Select 0 seconds for no timeout (default: 0 seconds)
Auto Logout 0-999 minutesPeriod of inactivity of a logged-in user at a console after which he will be automatically logged out. There may be a disconnect because of the logout, depending on the defined rights in each CON and user ACL.Select 0 minutes for an automatic user logout when leaving OSD.Using the setting -1 allows the user to be logged in permanently, until a manual logout is executed.The timer is not active as long as the OSD is open (default: 0 minutes)

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

NEED HELP?

LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7

TECHNICAL

SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

OSD

- Select Configuration > Access in the main menu.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - OSD - 1

text_image OSINO CON 010125438 -- admin Configuration Access Force User Login : N Enable User ACL : N Enable CON ACL : N Enable new User : N Enable new CON : N Auto Disconnect : N OSO Timeout [sec]: 0 Auto Logout [min]: 0 Require user login to power iOS Enable CPU Access Control List for all users Enable CPU Access Control List for all COM devices Enable new user : N Enable new user access for new users Enable new user access for mini OSI devices Disconnect CPU from CPU upon spanning the OSI Specify inactivity time to quit OSI automatically Specify inactivity time for automatic user layout Cancel Save SUTCH 01

FIGURE 4-15. CONFIGURATION—ACCESS

You can select the following buttons.

TABLE 4-16. BUTTONS

BUTTON FUNCTION
Cancel Reject changes
Save Save changes

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

NEED HELP? LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7 TECHNICAL SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

JAVA TOOL

- Select System > Access in the task area.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - JAVA TOOL - 1

text_image File Edit Device Options Green Save Refresh Connect Recommended Activate Online Configuration Save Online Changes Downloaded Upload Monitoring Report... Device Finder... System Check... Save Status... JF 2015030940305_Repett1.sp Status Control Administration Assignment System System-Daily Forward Switch Network Date and Time Matrix Grid Definition System - Access Active Settings Force User Logis Enable User ACL Enable Controls ACL Enable New User Enable New COM Auto Disconnect CSD Termset [mm] Auto-Logat [min] Show Help Show Help Provide Complete First Current CPI upon opening the CSD Specify Incentive Line (or solid CSD) underactivity (N = decreased) Specify Incentive Line (or automatic user logset (N = decreased), < N = inhibited) Cancel Config reloaded

FIGURE 4-16. SYSTEM-ACCESS

4.4.4 SWITCH

The configuration of the switching parameters is set in this menu.

You have the following options to access the menu.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - SWITCH - 1

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - SWITCH - 2

You can select the following settings.

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

TABLE 4-17. SWITCH SETTINGS

FIELD SELECTION DESCRIPTION
Video SharingactivatedThe user can switch to any CPU as an observer, including ones that are already assigned to another user (observer is without keyboard/mouse access).NOTE: Switch with thekey, not thekey.The operator will not be informed if further users connect as an observer to the CPU that is connected to his console.
deactivated Function not active (default)
Force ConnectactivatedThe user can connect to every single CPU as an operator, including ones that are related to another user.NOTE: The previous user is set to video-only status.To share K/M control, Force Connect has to be activated.
deactivated Function not active (default)
Force DisconnectactivatedExtension of Force Connect: If the user connects as an operator to a CPU already related to another user, the previous user will be disconnected.NOTE: To share K/M control Force Disconnect has to be deactivated.
deactivated Function not active (default)
CPU Auto ConnectactivatedIf a console is not connected to a CPU, you can establish an automatic connection to the next available CPU by pressing any key or mouse button.
deactivated Function not active (default)
CPU Timeout 0-999 minutesPeriod of inactivity after which a console will be automatically disconnected from its current CPU (default value: 0 minutes)
Keyboard Connectactivated Activate request of K/M control by keyboard event (key will be lost)
deactivated Function not active (default)
Mouse Connectactivated Activate request of K/M control by mouse event
deactivated Function not active (default)
Release Time 0-999 secondsPeriod of inactivity of a connected console after which K/M control can be requested by other consoles connected to the CPU.NOTE: Set '0" for an immediate transfer in real-time.Only one console can have keyboard and mouse control at the same time.The other consoles that are connected to the same CPU have a video only status (default value: 10 seconds)

NOTE: If the Keyboard Connect and/or Mouse Connect options are activated, the Release Time condition will have to be met until a new user will gain control.

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

NEED HELP?

LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7

TECHNICAL

SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

OSD

- Select Configuration > Switch in the main menu.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - OSD - 1

text_image ESR000 CEN 0T0123614 - admin Configuration ESC Switch Enable Video Sharing : N Force Connect : N Force Disconnect : N CPU Auto Connect : N CPU Timeout Iminl: 0 Keyboard Connect : N Mouse Connect : N Release Time [sec] 10 Allow shared video access to CPU Interface full KVM access to CPU, other consoles retain video Interface full KVM access to CPU, disconnect other consoles Connect to next available CPU requiring keyboard or mouse Specify inactivity time at currently connected CPU after which CPU will be disconnected automatically Enable CPU control requests for keyboard activity Enable CPU control requests by mouse activity Specify inactivity time to accept CPU control requests from other consoles Cancel Save SCHOW 01

FIGURE 4-17. CONFIGURATION-SWITCH

You can select the following buttons.

TABLE 4-18. BUTTONS

BUTTON FUNCTION
Cancel Reject changes
Save Save changes

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

NEED HELP? LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7 TECHNICAL SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

JAVA TOOL

- Select System > Switch in the task area.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - JAVA TOOL - 1

text_image File Edit Device Options Open Save Cancel Connect Disconnected Active Online Configuration Save Online Change Download Upload Monitoring Report Device Finder System Check Save Status... #20193658888_Regpvt1.sc Status Control Administration Assignment System System-Data Access Switch Referral Date and Time Matrix Grid Definition System - Switch Show Help Enable Video Sharing Force Connect Force Disconnect CPU Auto Connect CPU Termostat [mm] Keyboard Connect Release Connect Release Time [sec] Show CPI confirmation required by optional activity Show CPI confirmation required by release activity Specify Inactivity Note to adjust CPI confirmation required then another transaction Config reloaded

FIGURE 4-18. SYSTEM-SWITCH

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

4.4.5 NETWORK

The network configuration is set in this menu.

You have the following options to access the menu.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - NETWORK - 1

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - NETWORK - 2

You can select the following settings.

TABLE 4-19. NETWORK SETTINGS

FIELD SELECTION DESCRIPTION
DHCPactivatedThe network settings are automatically supplied by a DNS serverNOTE: If DHCP is activated and there is no physical network connection available, the boot times might increase.
deactivated Function not active (default)
IP addressByteInput of the IP address, if DHCP is not active (default: 192.168.100.99)
Subnet Mask ByteInput of the subnet mask in the form "255.255.255.0" if DHCP is not active (default: 255.255.255.0)
Gateway Byte Input of the subnet mask in the form "192.168.1.1" if DHCP is not active
API ServiceactivatedLAN interface at the Modular KVM Matrix Switch activated for access via Java tool (API service port 5555)
deactivated Function not active
FTP ServeractivatedFTP server for transmission of configuration files activated
deactivated Function not active
Syslog #1/#2activatedSyslog server for status request is active
deactivated Function not active (default)
Syslog Server #1/#2ByteInput of the IP address of the Syslog servers in the form "192.168.1.1" and of the Syslog port (default: 514)
LDAPactivatedLDAP for the request of information from a user administration is active
deactivated Function not active (default)
LDAP ServerByteInput of the IP address for the LDAP-Servers in the form "192.168.1.1" and the LDAP port (Default: 389)
LDAP Base DNTextInput of the LDAP Base DN according to the existing structure of the user directory
TraceDEBActivate debug messages in Trace (default: NO)NOTE: The debug messages are exclusively for matrix diagnostics. They only should be activated after consultation with the manufacturer. Otherwise, increased data traffic might limit the performance of the CPU board.
INFActivate information messages in Trace (default: NO)

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

NEED HELP?

LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7

TECHNICAL

SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

TABLE 4-19 (CONTINUED). NETWORK SETTINGS

FIELD SELECTION DESCRIPTION
Trace (continued)NOTActivate notification messages in Trace (default: YES)
WARActivate warning messages in Trace (default: YES)
ERRActivate error messages in Trace (default: YES)
Syslog #1/#2DEBActivate debug messages in Syslog (default: NO)NOTE: The debug messages are exclusively for matrix diagnostics. They only should be activated after consultation with the manufacturer. Otherwise, increased data traffic might limit the performance of the CPU board.
INFActivate information messages in Syslog (default: NO)
NOTActivate notification messages in Syslog (default: YES)
WARActivate warning messages in Syslog (default: YES)
ERRActivate error messages in Syslog (default: YES)

NOTE: Activate the modified network parameters by restarting the matrix.

CAUTION: Consult your system administrator before modifying the network parameters. Otherwise, unexpected results and failures can occur in combination with the network.

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

NEED HELP?

LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7

TECHNICAL

SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

OSD

- Select Configuration > Network in the main menu.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - OSD - 1

text_image adminPCON 010167832 Configuration ESC Network Interface DHCP : V Enable configuration of network parameters with DHCP server IP Address : 192 168 100 099 Subnet Mask : 255 255 255 000 Gateway : 000 000 000 000 Network Services API Service : V Enable API Service port (DSSS) FTP Server : V Enable FTP Server for configuration file transfers Syslog #1: N Enable Syslog Server #1 Syslog Server #1: 000 000 000 000 514 Syslog #2: N Enable Syslog Server #2 Syslog Server #2: 000 000 000 000 514 LDAP : N Enable authentication with Active Directory Server LDAP Server : 000 000 000 000 389 LDAP Base DN : Log Levels Trace : DEB N INF N NOT V WAR V ERR V Syslog #1: DEB N INF N NOT V WAR V ERR V Syslog #2: DEB N INF N NOT V WAR V ERR V Cancel Okay SWITCH 01

FIGURE 4-19. CONFIGURATION-NETWORK

You can select the following buttons.

TABLE 4-20. BUTTONS

BUTTON FUNCTION
Cancel Reject changes
Save Save changes

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

NEED HELP? LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7 TECHNICAL SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

RELEASE OF NETWORK PORTS

The following ports are used by the matrix depending on the configuration and have to be released at the security gateway, if necessary. The ports only will have to be released if you want to use the respective function.

TABLE 4-21. NETWORK PORTS

FUNCTION PORT
FTP 21
DNS 53
SNTP 123
SNMP 161/162
LDAP 389
Syslog 514
API 5555
Broadcast5556
Matrix-Grid5557

JAVA TOOL

- Select System > Network in the task area.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - JAVA TOOL - 1

text_image File Edit Devices Flux 1 Open - Save Retired Connect Discontinued Actually Online Configuration Save Online Changes Download Upload Monitoring Report Device Finder System Check Side Status JP-05103004000_RequestList Status Control Administration Assignment System System Data Access Switch Network Date and Time Matrix-Sand Definition System - Networks General Testing SNMP Show Help Network Interface (Online changes require a mini map server) DHCP IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway Mac Address Network Surveys (Online changes require a mini map server) API Service Enable off service (Net 2000) FTP Server Enable FTP server to configuration file transfers. Trace Log Level Debug Info Notice Warning Error Config returned

FIGURE 4-20. SYSTEM-NETWORK

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

NEED HELP? LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7 TECHNICAL SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

4.4.6 DATE AND TIME

Date and Time are set in this menu, based on Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP).

You have the following options to access the menu.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - DATE AND TIME - 1

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - DATE AND TIME - 2

You can select the following settings.

TABLE 4-22. DATE AND TIME SETTINGS

FIELD SELECTION DESCRIPTION
SNTP Clientactivated Enable network time server synchronization
deactivated Function not active (default)
SNTP ServerByteInput of the SNTP server IP address (default: 000.000.000.000)
Time ZoneRegionSet your specific time zone
Month 1–12Enter month
Date1–31Enter date
Year1–99Enter year
Day1–7 Enter day of week
Hours0–23Enter hour
Minutes0–59Enter minutes
Seconds0–59Enter seconds

NOTE: This is date format according to the English notation.

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

NEED HELP? LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7 TECHNICAL SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

OSD

- Select Configuration > Date + Time in the main menu.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - OSD - 1

text_image adminRCON_010125349 Multi-Screen Control ESC Arrangement - Switching Screens : 1 x 4 One run with four screens or two rows with two screens each Manual : N Reduce switching to manual switching with holes Disable automatic switching with more for multihend OSs Screen #1 Screen #2 Screen #3 Screen #4 CON_010125349 Screen not available Screen not available Screen not available Enabled : V Enabled : N Control : N Control : N Owner : shared Owner : N Frame : 0 sec Frame : sec Frame : sec Frame : sec Enabled : N Control : N Owner : N Frame : sec Screen #4 Screen not available Enabled : N Control : N Owner : N Frame : sec Cancel Okay SWITCH #1

FIGURE 4-21. CONFIGURATION-DATE + TIME

To configure a time server, follow these steps:

  1. Set the SNTP Client option to Y (Yes).
  2. Enter the IP address of your SNTP server in the SNTP Server field.
  3. Select your time zone in the Time Zone field.
  4. Press the Okay button to confirm your settings.
  5. Restart the matrix. The system time will be now provided by the SNTP server.

To set the real time clock without using SNTP, follow these steps:

  1. Set the current date in the Date field.
  2. Set the current Day in the Day field.
  3. Set the current time in the Time field.
  4. Press the RTC button to confirm your settings.

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

NEED HELP? LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7 TECHNICAL SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

JAVA TOOL

- Select System > Date + Time in the main menu.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - JAVA TOOL - 1

text_image File Edit Device Options Open Save Reload Connect Document Active Online Configuration Base Online Changes Download Upload Monitoring Report Device Finder System Check Base Status... Status Control Administration Assignment System System Data Access Switch Reference Date and Time Make Grid Definition Date and Time Show Help SWTP (Online changes measure a network request) SWTP Data network line serial synchronization SWTP Server Time Zone: Windows Constrained Internet Commandable Connection Latency Services Read Time Clock Date And Time 2015-04-16 12:30:21 Send Load Time Data and line of next time clock Get load line of risk computer Config reloaded

FIGURE 4-22. CONFIGURATION-DATE + TIME

To configure a time server, follow these steps:

  1. Enable SNTP option.
  2. Enter the IP address of your SNTP server in the SNTP Server field.
  3. Select your time zone in the Time Zone field.
  4. Press the Apply button to confirm your settings.
  5. Restart the matrix. The system time will be now provided by the SNTP server.

To set the real time clock without using SNTP, follow these steps:

  1. Set the current date in the Date and Time field.
  2. Set the current time in the Day and Time field.
  3. Press the Apply button to set the system time.
  4. Option: If you want to receive the time from your currently used computer, press the Get Local Time button.

4.5 USER SETTINGS

You have the option to configure the following user settings.

4.5.1 USER

New users and their user settings and permissions are set in this menu.

You have the following options to access the menu.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - USER - 1

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - USER - 2

You can select the following settings.

TABLE 4-23. USER SETTINGS

FIELD SELECTION DESCRIPTION
Name Text User name (case-sensitive)
Password Text User password (case-sensitive)
Repeat Password Text Repeat user password (case-sensitive)
FTPactivatedAccess permission via FTP. This setting is necessary for file access from the Java tool or any web browser.
desactivated Function not active (default).
Power UseractivatedUser has user rightsPermission to switch consoles to CPUs in Extended Switching according to the CON or User ACL
desactivated Function not active
Super UseractivatedPermission to switch any console to any CPU in Extended Switching.
desactivated Function not active
AdministratoractivatedPermission for system configuration and all switching operationsUser has administrator rightsThis setting is required for an online connection with the Java tool
desactivated Function not active
LDAP UseractivatedPermission to login via domain user
desactivated Function not active

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

NEED HELP?

LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7

TECHNICAL

SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

OSD

- Select Configuration > User in the main menu.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - OSD - 1

text_image admin@PCON_010167832 Configuration F1:ID F2:Name E3:Next F4:Previous FS:Refresh F5:Find ESC User List ID : 1 Login Name : admin Full Name : Password : ****** Repeat Password : ****** Administrator : V HTTP Access : V Super User : V FTP Access : V Power User : V Telnet Access : V LDAP User : N CPU Access Control List Full access 01002 CPU_010135668 01003 CPU_010207794 01001 CPU_016090105 01004 CPU_040011492 Video access No access New Edit Enter a name to find an item SWITCH 01

FIGURE 4-23. CONFIGURATION-USER

You can select the following buttons.

TABLE 4-24. BUTTONS

BUTTON FUNCTION
New Create a new user
Edit Edit an existing user
Delete Delete an existing user
Cancel Reject changes
Save Save changes

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

NEED HELP? LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7 TECHNICAL SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

JAVA TOOL

- Select Definition > User in the task area.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - JAVA TOOL - 1

text_image File Edit Device Options Open Save Rename Connect Disconnect Active Online Configuration Save Online Changes Download Upload Monitoring Report Device Finder System Check Save Status... 201503058109_Report11.aq Status Control Administration Assignment System Definition EQT Units CPU Devices CON Devices User Definition - User ID Name 00001 author 00002 request ID Name unknown Password Administrator Super User Power User FTP CPU/AGS Control Favorites Macros Soft Access View Access No Access ID Name ID Name 0101 QPF-PC 111.0244 0102 QPF-PC 112 0103 QPF-PC 113 0104 QPF-PC 114 0105 QPF-PC 115.0243 0106 QPF-PC 116 0107 QPF-PC 117 0108 QPF-PC 118 0109 QPF-PC 119 0110 QPF-PC 120A 0111 QPF-PC 121F 0112 QPF-PC 122C 0113 QPF-PC 123D 0114 QPF-PC 124E 0115 QPF-PC 125F 0116 QPF-PC 126G 0117 QPF-PC 127H 0118 QPF-PC 128I 0119 QPF-PC 129J 0120 QPF-PC 130K 0121 QPF-PC 131L 0122 QPF-PC 132M 0123 QPF-PC 133N 0124 QPF-PC 134O 0125 QPF-PC 135P Developer will use to change the access button here. Use right hand closer this is saved after. Save Settings in Create Settings Info. Grow user Create action Cancel

FIGURE 4-24. DEFINITION-USER

You can select the following buttons.

TABLE 4-25. BUTTONS

BUTTON FUNCTION
New Open a new user configuration
Delete Delete an existing user
Apply Create a new user account
Cancel Reject changes

To configure user access rights for CPUs, follow these steps.

  1. Select a user in the User list.

  2. Click the right mouse button once on a CPU in one of the respective access lists (Full Access, Video Access and No Access). Two lists for selection will appear in which you can move the respective CPU and change the access rights.

  3. Confirm the configuration with the Apply button.

To create a new user, follow these steps.

  1. Press the New button.
  2. Select a template of an existing user if applicable (Choose template).
  3. Press the OK button.

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

NEED HELP?

LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7

TECHNICAL

SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

  1. Set a user name.
  2. Set a password.
  3. Set general access permissions.
  4. Set user permissions for CPU access (paste function).
  5. Set user favorites for OSD access.
  6. Press the Apply button to save the new user settings.
    You can select the following keyboard commands.

TABLE 4-26. KEYBOARD COMMANDS

FUNCTION KEYBOARD COMMAND
Add CPU to Full Access list
Add CPU to Video Access list
Add CPU to No Access list

4.5.2 FAVORITE LIST USERS

Individual favorite lists of CPUs that will be switched frequently can be created for different users in this menu. A favorite list can contain up to 16 different CPUs.

The switching of the favorites is done via hotkey using the keyboard (see Section 5.1.1).

You have the following options to access the menu.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - FAVORITE LIST USERS - 1

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - FAVORITE LIST USERS - 2

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

NEED HELP? LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7 TECHNICAL SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

OSD

- Select Assignments > User Favorites in the main menu.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - OSD - 1

text_image admin@CON 01014888/ User Favorites F1:10 F2:Name F3:Next F4:Previous FS:Refresh F5:Find ESC CPU Devices 01000 CPU_010129182 01005 CPU_010129232 01009 CPU_010129390 01001 CPU_010148585 01007 CPU_03 01006 CPU_04 Favorites/CPU Data User 00001 admin CPU device 01006 CPU_04 User Favorites 1 01003 CPU_05 2 01008 CPU_06 3 02000 VCPU_02000 4 02001 VCPU_02001 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 CPU assigned CON connected Status EXT list Cancel Okay SWITCH 01

FIGURE 4-25. ASSIGNMENTS—USER FAVORITES

To create a favorite list for your user, proceed as follows:

  1. Select a CPU to be moved to the favorite list on the CPU Devices list. Press to move a CPU Device to the favorite list. Press to remove a CPU.
  2. The order of the CPU Devices within the favorite list can be changed by pressing <+> and <->.
  3. Press the Save button to save the settings.

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

NEED HELP? LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7 TECHNICAL SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.8 77.2 26 9

JAVA TOOL

Select the respective user in the working area of the User menu for the favorite list and open the Favorites tab.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - JAVA TOOL - 1

text_image File Edit Device Editor Open Save Reload Connect Unconfirmed Activate Online Configuration Save Online Changes Download Upload Monitoring Report Devices Finder System Check Save Status JF20102003000_Respect1.jsp Definition - User ID Name Name Password Administrator Super User Power User FTP CPU Accessed Control Equities Errors CPU status ID Name 1011 Placid 11b 102 Placid 17b 103 AUST-011-WDC/24 104 AUST-012-SD/26 105 MNC-CLX-RX1 106 MNC-CLX-RX1 107 MNC-CLX-RX1 108 MNC-CLX-RX1 109 MNC-CLX-RX1 110 MNC-CLX-RX1 111 MNC-CLX-RX1 112 MNC-CLX-RX1 113 MNC-CLX-RX1 114 MNC-CLX-RX1 115 MNC-CLX-RX1 116 MNC-CLX-RX1 117 MNC-CLX-RX1 Transfer CPU: ID Name 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 User body: PVC and VCD type: PVC

FIGURE 4-26. DEFINITION-USER

To create a favorite list for any user, proceed as follows:

  1. Select the CPUs in the CPU available list that should be added to the favorite list (CPU assigned). By pressing the at the same time, more than one CPU Device can be marked.
  2. Press the > button to move the marked CPU Devices to the favorite list. If you press the >> button, the first eight CPU Devices from the CPU available list will be moved to the favorite list (CPU assigned).
  3. The order of marked CPU Devices within the favorite list can be changed by pressing <+> and <->.
  4. To remove marked CPU Devices from the favorite list, press the < button. If you press the << button, all CPU Devices will be removed from the favorite list.

4.5.3 USER MACROS

In this menu, macro commands for switching, disconnection or user administration can be created. Macro commands are created for each user separately.

A macro can execute up to 16 switching commands successively.

The execution of the macros is done via hotkey and the --F16> function keys (see Section 5.1.3).

To execute user macros, the user has to be logged in to the matrix.

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

You can select the following settings.

TABLE 4-27. USER MACROS SETTINGS

FIELD SELECTION DESCRIPTION
Function (01-16)Connect(P1=CON, P2=CPU)Set bidirectional connection from console P1 to CPU P2
Connect Video(P1=CON, P2=CPU)Set video connection from console P1 to CPU P2
Disconnect (P1=CON) Disconnect console P1
Logout User Logout current user
Set Real CPU(P1=VCPU, P2=RCPU)Assign a virtual CPU to a real CPU
Set Virtual CON(P1=RCON, P2=VCON)Assign a real console to a virtual console
Push (P1=CON)The user's KVM connection is forwarded to console P1 and is changed to a video only connection.
Push Video (P1=CON)The video signal of the current connection (KVM or video only) is forwarded to console P1. The user's connection remains unchanged (KVM or video only).
Get (P1=CON)The user's console gets a KVM connection to the CPU that is currently connected to console P1. The connection of console P1 is changed into a video only connection.
Get Video (P1=CON)The user's console gets a video only connection to the CPU that is currently connected to console P1. The connection of console P1 remains unchanged (KVM or video only).
Login User console P2 Login a certain user P1 at console P2
P1 CON or CPU Device Name of CON or CPU Device
P2 CPU or CPU DeviceName of CPU or CPU Device

You have the following options to access the menu.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION - 1

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION - 2

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

NEED HELP? LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7 TECHNICAL SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.226 9

OSD

- Select Configuration > User Macros in the main menu and select the user for which a user macro will be created.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - OSD - 1

text_image 03000 CON 010125349 -- admin Configuration F1:10 F2:Name F3:Next F4:Previous F5:Refresh F6:Find ESC User List User Macros Key : F01 Parameter #1 Parameter #2 Connect 03000 CON 010125349 01000 CPU 010129250 Connect Video Actual CON device Disconnect CON Macro Data Function CON Devices CPU Devices apply Parameter #1 Actual CON device Parameter #2 Disconnect CON SUPPORT #1

FIGURE 4-27. CONFIGURATION—USER MACROS

To create a macro for the selected user, proceed as follows:

  1. Select in the Key field the function key (F1-F16) for which a macro has to be created.
  2. Select the position in the Key list where a macro command is to be inserted.
  3. Select a macro command in the Macro Data field.
  4. Set the necessary parameters P1 and P2 (e.g., CON Devices or CPU Devices) for the selected macro command.
  5. Confirm your selection by pressing and repeat the process for further macro commands, if necessary.

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

JAVA TOOL

Select in the working area of the Definition > User menu the user for which macros are to be created and open the Macros tab.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - JAVA TOOL - 1

text_image File Edit Device Options 2 Open... Save... Refresh Connect Default Activate Online Configuration Save Online Changes Download Upgrade Monitoring Request Device Finder System Check Save Status for 20 information about _Request1.doc Status Control Administration Assignment System Definition EXIT Units CPU Devices COM Devices User Definition - User ID Name Password Administrator Super User Power User FTP CPU Access Control Favorites Status Key F1 Function P1 P2 01 Documented (P1+C03) Current CDS Devices 02 Documented (P1+C03, P2+C03) (0111, Realizer ) 2011(1, CPR-PC 01) 03 04 05 06 07 08 Documented (P1+C03, P2+C03) Current CDS Devices 2011(1, CPR-PC 01) 09 10 11 12 13 Cancel Default to Close Settings From Save User Delete Auto Cancel

FIGURE 4-28. DEFINITION-USER

To create a macro for the selected user, proceed as follows:

  1. Select in the Key field the function key (F1–F16) for which a macro has to be created.
  2. Select in the Function column the commands that should be part of the macro. The selection list is opened by a double-click on the empty fields.
  3. Select in the P1 and P2 columns the respective parameters for the macro functions (e.g. corresponding consoles and CPUs).
  4. Confirm your selections by pressing the Apply button.

For an efficient macro configuration, the following context functions are available:

Via right-click on the Macros tab, macros can be assigned to other users by using the Assign Macros to ... function and can be copied from other users by using the Copy Macros from ... function.

Via right-click on the macro list, macros of the selected key can be copied into the cache by using the Copy Key Macros function. You can paste the macros from the cache into a key by using the Paste Key Macros function and you can reset all macros of the selected key by using the Reset Key Macros function.

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

4.5.4 USER GROUPS

The KVM matrix allows you to bundle the users of a configuration into User Groups. The groups can be used to logically or thematically subdivide the users. As an application example, you can group all power users together.

The configuration of User Groups at the same times increases the clarity of the configuration.

You have the following options to access the menu:

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - USER GROUPS - 1

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - USER GROUPS - 2

OSD

To create and configure a User Group, proceed as follows:

  1. Select Configuration > User in the main menu.
  2. Press the New G button.
  3. Enter a group name into the field Name.
  4. Press the Okay button.

The group is created now.

To assign a user to a group, proceed as follows:

  1. Select Configuration > User in the main menu.
  2. Select the user you want to assign to a User Group.
  3. Select the User Group for the assignment in the field Member of Group using the cursor up and down keys.
  4. Press the Okay button.

The user is assigned to the User Group now.

Java-Tool

To create and configure a User Group, proceed as follows:

  1. Select the User Groups tab in the Definition >Groups menu of the task area.
  2. Press the New Group button.

A popup window will open.

  1. Select Create a standard Group in the popup window and press Ok.
  2. Enter a group name into the Name field.
  3. Press the Apply button.

The group is created now.

To assign a user to a group, proceed as follows:

  1. Select the User Groups tab in the Definition >Groups menu of the task area.
  2. Select the User Group to be assigned with a user.
  3. Select a user in the CPU/Group available list that you want to assign to the User Group.
  4. Move the highlighted user to the CPU/Group assigned list.
  5. Press the Okay button.

The user is assigned to the User Group now.

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

NEED HELP?

LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7

TECHNICAL

SUPPORT

1.8 77.8 7 7.2 26 9

4.6 EXTENDER SETTINGS

All extender units are managed in this menu. This includes the creation of new extender units and the deletion of existing extender units.

The extender unit describes the connection of an physical extender to the matrix. Every extender board with a direct cable connection to the matrix is recognized as an extender unit. Dual-Head KVM extenders will be recognized as two independent extender units.

NOTE: KVM Extenders automatically create extender units inside the matrix.

You have the following options to access the menu.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - EXTENDER SETTINGS - 1

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - EXTENDER SETTINGS - 2

You can select the following settings.

TABLE 4-28. EXTENDER SETTINGS

FIELD SELECTION DESCRIPTION
ID TextNumerical value of the extender ID (KVM extenders: ID is provided by extender unit [Serial No.] and cannot be changed)
Name Text Name of the extender unit
Fixedactivated Create an extender unit with a fixed port assignment (default)
deactivated Function not active.
Port 1–288 (depending on the matrix) Port number of the extender unit

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

NEED HELP?

LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7

TECHNICAL

SUPPORT

1.87 7.87 7.226 9

OSD

- Select Configuration > EXT Units in the main menu.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - OSD - 1

text_image admin.BCON 010167832 Configuration F1:ID F2:Name F3:Next F4:Previous F5:Refresh F6:Find ESC EXT Units 010165668 EXT_010165668 010167832 EXT_010167832 010203247 EXT_010203247 010207794 EXT_010207794 016090105 EXT_016090105 040011492 EXT_040011492 EXT Data ID : 10135668 CPU/CON assigned Name : EXT_010135668 01003 CPU_010207794 Fixed : N Port 1/2 : 11 20 Universal : N General OSD Data Horizontal mouse speed [1/x]: 4 Vertical mouse speed [1/x]: 5 Double click time [ms]: 200 Keyboard layout : German DE.129 Video mode : variable Extender OSD Data Enable CPU selection : N Enable connection info : N Update connection info : N Display time [sec] 0 Horizontal position : 0 Vertical position : 0 EXT type Input Signals CW1 CW2 Output Signals CW1 CW2 DVI/VDA-CPU (video ..) V H DVI/VDA-CON (video ..) N H HID-CON (keyb..mouse.) N H HID-CPU (keyb..mouse.) W H Audio (analog,digital) N H Audio (analog,digital) N H RS232 (serial ..) N H RS232 (serial ..) N H USB-CON (embedded) N H USB-CPU (embedded) N H USB-CON (standalone) N H USB-CPU (standalone) N H Universal-CON N H Universal-CPU N H Cascade-CON N H Cascade-CPU N H New Edit Delete Save As... File Save SWITCH 01

FIGURE 4-29. CONFIGURATION—EXT UNITS

You can select the following buttons.

TABLE 4-29. BUTTONS

BUTTON FUNCTION
New Create a new extender unit
Edit Edit an existing extender unit
Delete Delete an existing extender unit
Cancel Reject changes
Save Save changes

The settings fo the OSD Data are described in Section 4.11.2.

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

NEED HELP? LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7 TECHNICAL SUPPORT

1.87 7.87 7.2 26 9

JAVA TOOL

- Select Definition >EXT Units in the task area.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - JAVA TOOL - 1

text_image EVI - EXT Device Labels Open Save Refresh Correct Disclosed Activate Online Configuration Save Online Changes Download Upload Monitoring Report Device Finder System Check Show Status EVI-SEM/SEM_Exporting Status Control Administration Assignment System Definition EXT Units CPU Devices CON Devices User Definition - EXT Units ID Name Port Type 01 F10229402 75 N611.01.2011 1 CPU 02 F10229403 75 N611.01.2011 1 CPU 03 F10229404 75 N611.01.2011 1 CPU 04 F10229405 75 N611.01.2011 1 CPU 05 F10229406 75 N611.01.2011 1 CPU 06 F10229407 75 N611.01.2011 1 CPU 07 F10229408 75 N611.01.2011 1 CPU 08 F10229409 75 N611.01.2011 1 CPU 09 F10229410 75 N611.01.2011 1 CPU 10 F10229411 75 N611.01.2011 1 CPU 11 F10229412 75 N611.01.2011 1 CPU 12 F10229413 75 N611.01.2011 1 CPU 13 F10229414 75 N611.01.2011 1 CPU 14 F10229415 75 N611.01.2011 1 CPU 15 F10229416 75 N611.01.2011 1 CPU 16 F10229417 75 N611.01.2011 1 CPU 17 F10229418 75 N611.01.2011 1 CPU 18 F10229419 75 N611.01.2011 1 CPU 19 F10229420 75 N611.01.2011 1 CPU 20 F10229421 75 N611.01.2011 1 CPU 21 F10229422 75 N611.01.2011 1 CPU 22 F10229423 75 N611.01.2011 1 CPU 23 F10229424 75 N611.01.2011 1 CPU 24 F10229425 75 N611.01.2011 35 CPU

FIGURE 4-30. DEFINITION—EXT UNITS

You can select the following buttons.

TABLE 4-30. BUTTONS

BUTTON FUNCTION
New Create a new extender unit
Delete Delete an existing extender unit
Apply Confirm changes of an extender unit
Cancel Reject changes

FLEXIBLE PORT EXTENDER UNITS

Extenders with auto-ID functionality are automatically recognized and cannot be created manually. This is the Flex Port function of the matrix.

CAUTION: The connection of a fixed port extender unit (e.g., USB 2.0) to a Flex-Port can cause unintended results.

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

4.7 USB 2.0 EXTENDER

This section helps you to configure and use your USB 2.0 extenders. These extenders will have to be connected to standard I/O boards in this case. USB 2.0 extenders can be configured for independent switching or can be assigned to already existing KVM extenders.

You have the following options to access the menu.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - USB 2.0 EXTENDER - 1

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - USB 2.0 EXTENDER - 2

OSD

- Select Configuration >EXT Units in the main menu.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - OSD - 1

text_image admin@CON_010167832 Configuration F1: ID F2: Name F3: Next F4: Previous FS: Refresh F5: Find ESC EXI Units ID : 10135668 CPU/CON assigned Name : EXI_010135668 01083 CPU_010207794 Fixed : N Port 1/2 : 11 0 Universal : N General OSD Data Horizontal mouse speed [1/x]: 4 Vertical mouse speed [1/x]: 5 Double click time [ms]: 200 Keyboard layout : German OE.129 Video mode : variable Extender OSD Data Enable CPU selection : N Enable connection info : N Update connection info : N Display time [sec]: 0 Horizontal position : 0 Vertical position : 0 EXT Type Input Signals CW1 CW2 Output Signals CW1 CW2 DVI/VGA-CPU (video ..) V N DVI/VGA-CON (video ..) N N HID-CON (keyb.. mouse..) N N HID-CPU (keyb.. mouse..) V N Audio (analog, digital) N N Audio (analog, digital) N N RS232 (serial ..) N N RS232 (serial ..) N N USB-CON (embedded) N N USB-CPU (embedded) N N USB-CON (standalone) N N USB-CPU (standalone) N N Universal-CON N N Universal-CPU N N Cascade-CON N N Cascade-CPU N N New Edit Switch 01

FIGURE 4-31. CONFIGURATION—EXT UNITS

  1. To configure a USB 2.0 extender unit, press the New button. An extender with an eight-digit ID will be created, starting with digit 9.
  2. Assign an appropriate name to the extender in the Name field.
  3. Enter the port number of the matrix physically connected to the USB 2.0 extender unit into the Port field.
  4. To configure the created extender as a CON Unit, set the USB-CON (standalone) option to Y (C#1 in the Input Signals column) and confirm by pressing the Okay button.
  5. To configure the created extender as a CON Unit, set the USB-CPU (standalone) option to Y (C#1 in the Output Signals column) and confirm by pressing the Okay button.

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

  1. To create an individually switchable Device for the USB 2.0 CON extender, select Configuration > CON Devices and press the New R button. Alternatively, you can assign the USB 2.0 CON extender to an already existing CON Device. For this purpose, select the Device and move the USB 2.0 CON extender from the EXT available field into the EXT assigned field.
  2. Give an appropriate name to the new Device in the Name field.
  3. Repeat steps 6 and 7 for all USB 2.0 CPU extenders in the Configuration > CPU Devices menu.
  4. If you use parallel operation within the matrix, set the Release Time in the Configuration > Switch menu to 10 seconds or more (see Section 4.11.6).
  5. Restart all I/O boards on which USB 2.0 extenders have been configured or alternatively restart the matrix.
    The USB 2.0 extenders are now configured and can be used.

JAVA TOOL

- Select Definition >EXT Units in the task area.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - JAVA TOOL - 1

text_image File Edit Device Options Open Save Cancel Correct Document Active Online Configuration Save Online Changes Download Upload Monitoring Report Device Finder System Check Save Status GO 2015030863201_Report11a Status Control Administration Assignment System Definition EXT Units CPU Devices COM Devices User Definition - EXT Units ID Name Part Type 01 F10223482 75-901 (N:201) 1 CPU 02 F10223482 75-902 (N:201) 2 CPU 03 F10223473 75-903 (N:201) 3 CPU 04 F10223463 75-904 (N:201) 4 CPU 05 F10223453 75-905 (N:201) 5 CPU 06 F10223471 75-907 (N:201) 6 CPU 07 F10223473 75-908 (N:201) 7 CPU 08 F10223476 75-909 (N:201) 8 CPU 09 F10223482 75-910 (N:201) 9 CPU 10 F10223483 75-911 (N:201) 10 CPU 11 F10223484 75-912 (N:201) 11 CPU 12 F10223485 75-913 (N:201) 12 CPU 13 F10223486 75-914 (N:201) 13 CPU 14 F10223487 75-915 (N:201) 14 CPU 15 F10223488 75-916 (N:201) 15 CPU 16 F10223489 75-917 (N:201) 16 CPU 17 F10223490 75-918 (N:201) 17 CPU 18 F10223491 75-919 (N:201) 18 CPU 19 F10223492 75-920 (N:201) 19 CPU 20 F10223493 75-921 (N:201) 20 CPU 21 F10223494 75-922 (N:201) 21 CPU 22 F10223495 75-923 (N:201) 22 CPU 23 F10223496 75-924 (N:201) 23 CPU 24 F10223497 75-925 (N:201) 24 CPU 25 F10223498 75-926 (N:201) 25 CPU End Subs. Format Version Type CPU Standard View Export View Name Basic Mod A Mod B Current/Current Data MCI I/O/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/ Current Data: MCI I/O/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/ MCI I/O/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/ MCI I/O/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/ MCI I/O/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/ MCI I/O/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/ MCI I/O/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/ MCI I/O/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/ MCI I/O/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/ MCI I/O/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEC/IEc/ MCI I/O/IEC/IEc/ MCI I/O/IEc/ MCI I/O/IEc/ MCI I/O/IEc/ MCI I/O/IEc/ MCI I/O/IEc/ MCI I/O/IEc/ MCI I/O/IEc/ MCI I/O/IEc/ MCI I/O/IEc/ MCI I/O/IEc/ MCI I/O/IEc/ MCI I/O/IEc/ MCI I/O/IEc/

FIGURE 4-32. DEFINITION—EXT UNITS

  1. Press the New button. A popup window opens.
  2. Select (Templates) in the selection box, if you want to use a template for a USB 2.0 CON Unit (USB CON Unit) or a USB 2.0 CPU Unit (USB CPU Unit). An extender with an eight-digit ID will be created, starting with digit 9.
  3. Give an appropriate name to the extender in the Name field.
  4. Enter the port number of the matrix physically connected to the USB 2.0 extender unit into the Port field.
  5. Confirm your settings by pressing the Apply button.
  6. The USB 2.0 CON extender now has to be either assigned to an existing CON Device in the menu Definition >CON Devices or a new CON Device has to be created for the assignment by pressing the New button.

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

  1. The USB 2.0 CPU extender now has to be either assigned to an existing CON Device in the Definition > CPU Devices menu or a new CON Device has to be created for the assignment by pressing the New button.
  2. If you use parallel operation within the matrix, set the Release Time in the Configuration > Switch menu to 10 seconds or more (see Section 4.11.6).
  3. Restart all I/O boards on which USB 2.0 extenders have been configured or alternatively restart the matrix.

The USB 2.0 extenders are now configured and can be used.

NOTE: Created extender units are always set as fixed-port extenders. This configuration is necessary if you want to switch, e.g. USB 2.0 connections via the matrix.

NOTE: To make a fixed port available again for Flex-Port extender units after deleting a fixed-port extender unit, you must restart the I/O board.

4.8 EXTENDERS FOR UNI I/O BOARDS (USB 2.0/USB 3.0)

This section will help you to configure and use your USB 2.0/3.0 extenders. To use USB 3.0 extenders, you need at least one UNI I/O board and SFP modules based on 6.25 Gbit/s for the matrix.

You have the following options to configure the system:

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - EXTENDERS FOR UNI I/O BOARDS (USB 2.0/USB 3.0) - 1

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - EXTENDERS FOR UNI I/O BOARDS (USB 2.0/USB 3.0) - 2

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

OSD

- Select Configuration > EXT Units in the main menu.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - OSD - 1

text_image adani@CON 010167832 Configuration F1:ID F2:Name F3:Next F4:Previous FS:Refresh F5:Find ESC EXT Units ID : 10135668 CPU/CON assigned Name : EXT_010135668 01005 CPU_010207794 Fixed : N Port 1/2 : I1 /# Universal : H General OSD Data Horizontal mouse speed I1/xI: 4 Vertical mouse speed I1/xI: 5 Double click time ImsI: 200 Keyboard layout German OE.129 Video mode variable Extender OSD Data Enable CPU selection : N Enable connection info : N Update connection info : N Display time IsecI: 0 Horizontal position : A Vertical position : D EXT Type Input Signals CW1 CW2 Output Signals CW1 CW2 DVI/VGA-CPU (video ..) V N DVI/VGA-CON (video ..) H N HID-CON (keyb.. mouse.) H N HID-CPU (keyb.. mouse.) V N Audio (analog, digital) H N Audio (analog, digital) H N RS232 (serial ..) H N RS232 (serial ..) H N USB-CON (embedded) H N USB-CPU (embedded) H N USB-CON (standalone) H N USB-CPU (standalone) H N Universal-CON H N Universal-CPU H N Cascade-CON H N Cascade-CPU H N SWITCH 01

FIGURE 4-33. CONFIGURATION—EXT UNITS

  1. Insert the SFP modules into the matrix and connect the extenders according to the required application.
    One extender will be created for each SFP module in the EXT Units list. The appropriate names always start with "UNI."
  2. To configure a CON Unit, select one of the extenders in the EXT Units list that are physically connected to a USB CON Unit.
  3. Edit the extender by setting the USB-CON (standalone) option in the Input Signals field to Y for C#1. Set also the Universal-CPU option in the Output Signals field to N for C#1.
  4. To configure a CPU Unit, select one of the extenders in the Ext Units list that are physically connected to a USB CPU Unit.
  5. Edit the extender by setting the USB-CPU (standalone) option in the Output Signals field to Y for C#1. Set also the Universal-CPU option in the Input Signals field to N for C#1.
  6. The edited EXT Units for the respective USB CON Units now have to be either assigned to an existing CON Device or you have to create a new CON Device by using the New R. button for an assignment in the Configuration > CON Devices menu.
  7. The edited EXT Units for the respective USB CPU Units now have to be either assigned to an existing CPU Device or you have to create a new CPU Device by using the New R. button for an assignment in the Configuration > CPU Devices menu.
  8. If you use parallel operation within the matrix, set the Release Time in the Configuration > Switch menu to 10 seconds or more.
  9. Restart the matrix.
    The USB extenders are completely configured now and can be used.

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

JAVA TOOL

- Select Definition >EXT Units in the task area.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - JAVA TOOL - 1

text_image File Edit Device Options 2 Open Save Cancel Correct Cancel Adjust Online Configuration Save Online Changes Download Upload Monitoring Report Device Finder System Check Save Status GO Administration User: Page-11.jpg Status Control Administration Assignment System Definition Exit Units CPU Devices CDN Devices User Definition - EXIT Units

ID Names Port Type

01 F10229682 75-1011-1-201 1 CPU 02 F10229694 75-1021-1-201 2 CPU 03 F10229679 75-1031-1-201 3 CPU 04 F10229663 75-1041-1-201 4 CPU 05 F10229659 75-1051-1-201 5 CPU 06 F10229671 75-1071-1-201 7 CPU 07 F10229673 75-1081-1-201 8 CPU 08 F10229673 75-1091-1-201 9 CPU 09 F10229682 75-1101-1-201 10 CPU 10 F10229683 75-1111-1-201 11 CPU 11 F10229684 75-1121-1-201 12 CPU 12 F40032541 75-1541-1-201 54 CPU 13 F40032536 75-1551-9/7 60 CPU 14 F40032539 75-1561-1-201 61 CPU 15 F40032543 75-1571-1-201 33 CPU 16 F40032549 75-1581-1-201 39 CPU 17 F40032558 75-1591-1-201 56 CPU 18 F40032568 75-1601-1-201 48 CPU 19 F40032569 75-1611-1-201 28 CPU 20 F40032583 75-1621-1-201 27 CPU 21 F40032588 75-1631-1-201 23 CPU 22 F40032589 75-1641-1-201 24 CPU 23 F40032593 75-1651-1-201 30 CPU 24 F40032603 75-1661-1-201 39 CPU Estimate Settings in Case Settings Name Name CPU Assigned SOSTA CNT PCS TCA/DBT Port Fixed Editor Type Hardware Version Type CPU Standard View Export View Name Basic Mod A Mod B COMMENTS Wizard : [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] HDD Interface Resource : [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] Winning Mode : [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] Digital Media : [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] WDC/CPX/ADV Service : [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] USB/CPX/OS/ADV : [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] USB/CPX/OS/ADV : [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] Electronic CPX : [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] Electronic CPY : [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]

FIGURE 4-34. DEFINITION—EXT UNITS

  1. Insert the SFP modules into the matrix and connect the extender according to the required application.
    One extender will be created for each SFP module in the Ext Units list. The appropriate names always start with "UNI."
  2. To configure a CON Unit, select one of the extenders in the Ext Units list that are physically connected to a USB CON Unit.
  3. Select the item UNI CON USB in the Type selection box of the Extender Type tab and confirm your settings by pressing the Apply button.
  4. Restart the I/O board upon request in the popup window by pressing the Yes button.
  5. To configure a CPU Unit, select one of the extenders in the Ext Units list that are physically connected to a USB CPU Unit.
  6. Select the item UNI CPU USB in the Type selection box of the Extender Type tab and confirm your settings by pressing the Apply button.
  7. Restart the I/O board upon request in the popup window by pressing the Yes button.
  8. The edited EXT Units for the respecting USB CON Units now have to be either assigned to an existing CON Device or you have to create a new CON Device by using the New button for an assignment in the Definition > CON Devices menu.
  9. The edited EXT Units for the respecting USB CPU Units now have to be either assigned to an existing CPU Device or you have to create a new CPU Device by using the New button for an assignment in the Definition > CPU Devices menu.
  10. If you use parallel operation within the matrix, set the Release Time in the System > Switch menu to 10 s or more (). The USB extenders are completely configured now and can be used.

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

4.9 CONFIGURATION OF SDI

This section will help you to configure the matrix for the use of SDI. Using SDI requires at least one I/O board and appropriate SFP modules according to the SDI video signal to be used.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - CONFIGURATION OF SDI - 1

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - CONFIGURATION OF SDI - 2

OSD

- Select Configuration > EXT Units in the main menu.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - OSD - 1

text_image admin:RCON 010167832 Configuration F1:ID F2:Name F3:Next F4:Previous F5:Refresh F6:Find ESC EXT Units 01016568 EXI_01016568 010167832 EXI_010167832 010203247 EXI_010203247 010207794 EXI_010207794 016090105 EXI_016090105 040011492 EXI_040011492 EXT Data ID : 10135668 CPU/CON assigned Name : EXI_010135668 01003 CFU_010207794 Fixed : N Port 1/2 : 11 A Universal : N General OSD Data Horizontal mouse speed [1/x]: 4 Vertical mouse speed [1/x]: 5 Double click time [ms]: 200 Keyboard layout : German DE.129 Video mode : variable Extender OSD Data Enable CPU selection : N Enable connection info : N Update connection info : N Display time [sec] 3 Horizontal position : 0 Vertical position : 9 EXT Type Input Signals C#1 C#2 Output Signals C#1 C#2 DVI/VGA-CPU (video ..) V N DVI/VGA-CON (video ..) N N HID-CON (keyb.. mouse.. ) N HID-CPU (keyb.. mouse.. ) V N Audio (analog. digital) N N Audio (analog. digital) N N RS232 (serial ..) N N RS232 (serial ..) N N USB-CON (embedded) N N USB-CPU (embedded) N N USB-CON (standalone) N N USB-CPU (standalone) N N Universal-CON N N Universal-CPU N N Cascade-CON N N Cascade-CPU N N New Edit SUPPORT

FIGURE 4-35. CONFIGURATION—EXT UNITS

  1. Insert the SFP modules into the matrix. One extender will be created for each SFP module in the EXT Units list. The appropriate names always start with "UNI."
  2. To configure an SDI input, select one of the extenders in the EXT Units list that corresponds to the respective SFP and is intended to be used as input.
  3. Edit the extender by setting the Universal-CPU option in the Output Signals field to Y for C#1. Set also the Universal-CON option in the Input Signals field to N for C#1.
  4. To configure an SDI output, select one of the extenders in the EXT Units list that corresponds to the respective SFP and is intended to be used as output.
  5. Edit the extender by setting the Universal-CON option in the Input Signals field to Y for C#1. Set also the Universal-CPU option in the Output Signals field to N for C#1.

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

  1. The edited EXT Units for the SDI inputs now have to be either assigned to an existing CPU Device or you have to create a new CPU Device by using the New R. button for an assignment in the Configuration > CPU Devices menu.
  2. The edited EXT Units for the SDI outputs now have to be either assigned to an existing CON Device or you have to create a new CON Device by using the New R. button for an assignment in the Configuration > CON Devices menu.
  3. Restart the Matrix.
    The SDI inputs and outputs are completely configured now and can be used.

JAVA TOOL

- Select Definition > EXT Units in the task area.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - JAVA TOOL - 1

text_image File Edit Device Options 1 Open Save Reset Connect Connect Active Online Configuration Save Online Changes Download Upload Monitoring Report Device Finder System Check Save Status 2015/03/2016.02.01 - Page 1.0 - C Status Control Administration Assignment System Definition EXT Units CPU Devices COM Devices User Definition - EXT Units ID Name Part Type 01 04020880 75-957 (F/291) 1 CPU 02 01020905 75-955 (F/291) 2 CPU 03 01020910 75-955 (F/291) 3 CPU 04 01020902 75-954 (F/292) 4 CPU 05 01020910 75-953 (F/292) 5 CPU 06 01020911 75-957 (F/292) 6 CPU 07 01020915 75-948 (F/292) 7 CPU 08 01020913 75-946 (F/292) 8 CPU 09 01020913 75-944 (F/292) 9 CPU 10 01020902 75-943 (F/293) 10 CPU 11 01020903 75-941 (F/293) 11 CPU 12 01020899 75-942 (F/293) 12 CPU 13 04030341 75-944 (F/293) 13 CPU 14 04030348 75-942 (F/293) 14 CPU 15 04030358 75-947 (F/293) 15 CPU 16 01020884 75-948 (F/293) 16 CPU 17 01020886 75-946 (F/293) 17 CPU 18 01020888 75-945 (F/293) 18 CPU 19 01020886 75-944 (F/293) 19 CPU 20 01020883 75-943 (F/293) 20 CPU 21 01020876 75-942 (F/293) 21 CPU 22 01020866 75-941 (F/293) 22 CPU 23 01020866 75-940 (F/293) 23 CPU 24 01020864 75-938 (F/293) 24 CPU 25 01020868 75-936 (F/293) 25 CPU Average Settings: Data Settings: Description Tools Formware Version Type: CPU Standard View Export View Name Desc Mod A Mod B UserContext User name: NET Framework / Microsoft : Building Audio : Digital System : RSD/RMSRDSPure name: USB-CPU / unmodified : USB-CPU / photodomain : Unchanged CPL : Circumpl CPL : Accession CPL : Accession Code: Accession Date: Accession Event: Accession Control: Accession Display:

FIGURE 4-36. DEFINITION—EXT UNITS

  1. Insert the SFP modules into the matrix.
    One extender will be created for each SFP module in the EXT Units list. The appropriate names always start with "UNI."
  2. To configure an SDI input, select one of the extenders in the EXT Units list that corresponds to the respective SFP and is intended to be used as input.
  3. Select the item UNI CPU in the Type selection box of the Extender Type tab and confirm your settings by pressing the Apply button.
  4. Restart the I/O board upon request in the popup window by pressing the Yes button.
  5. To configure an SDI output, select one of the extenders in the EXT Units list that corresponds to the respective SFP and is intended to be used as output.
  6. Select the item UNI CON in the Type selection box of the Extender Type tab and confirm your settings by pressing the Apply button.
  7. Restart the I/O board upon request in the popup window by pressing the Yes button.
  8. The edited EXT Units for the SDI inputs now have to be either assigned to an existing CPU Device or you have to create a new CPU Device by using the New R. button for an assignment in the Configuration > CPU Devices menu.

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

NEED HELP? LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7 TECHNICAL SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

  1. The edited EXT Units for the SDI outputs now have to be either assigned to an existing CON Device or you have to create a new CON Device by using the New R. button for an assignment in the Configuration > CON Devices menu.

The SDI inputs and outputs are completely configured now and can be used.

4.10 CPU SETTINGS

New CPU Devices are configured in this menu including their assignment to extenders.

The assignment helps to describe and switch more complex computer configurations (e.g. Quad-Head with USB 2.0) in the matrix.

You have the following options to access the menu.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - CPU SETTINGS - 1

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - CPU SETTINGS - 2

You can select the following settings.

TABLE 4-31. CPU SETTINGS

FIELD SELECTION DESCRIPTION
ID Text ID of the CPU Unit (see Section 4.4.2)
Name Text Name of the CPU Device
Virtual Deviceactivated Create new CPU Device as a virtual one
deactivated Function not active (default)
Allow Privateactivated Allow switching to the respective CPU Device in Private Mode
deactivated Function not active (default)
Force Privateactivated Force switching to the respective CPU only in Private Mode
deactivated Function not active (default)
Fix Frameactivated Force showing a red frame when switching to the respective CPU
deactivated Function not active (default)

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

NEED HELP?

LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7

TECHNICAL

SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

OSD

- Select Configuration > CPU Units in the main menu.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - OSD - 1

text_image 04000 @ 03000 CON 010125349 -- admin Configuration F1:ID F2:Name F3:Next F4:Previous E5:Refresh F6:Find ESC CPU Devices 01000 CPU 010125911 01001 CPU_010129232 01002 CPU_010129250 01003 CPU_010144317 02000 VCPU_02000 CPU Data ID : 1000 CPU assigned Name : CPU_010124911 Virtual Device : N CDN connected Allow Private : N Force Private : N FIX frame : N EXT available EXI assigned 010124911 044 EXI_10124911 New R. New V. Edit Delete Break Up Save Enter a name to find an item SUIT DIRECT

FIGURE 4-37. CONFIGURATION—CPU DEVICES

You can select the following buttons.

TABLE 4-32. BUTTONS

BUTTON FUNCTION
New R. Create a new real CPU device
New V. Create a new virtual CPU device
Edit Edit an existing CPU device
Delete Delete an existing CPU device
Cancel Reject changes
SaveSave changes

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

NEED HELP? LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7 TECHNICAL SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

JAVA TOOL

- Select Definition > CPU Devices in the task area.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - JAVA TOOL - 1

text_image File Edit Device Options Gram, Save Reload Connect Document Activate Online Configuration Save Online Changes Download Upload Monitoring Report Device Finder System Check Save Status Status Control Administration Assignment System Definition Exit Units CPU/Devices CDN/Devices User Definition - CPU Devices ID Name ID: 01111 UP-PC 191-0241 CPU Assigned COM Connected Virtual Device Allow Private Force Private Fix Frame Extension Management CON Access Control User Access Control Extension guidelines ID Name Port 01111 UP-PC 191-0241 CPU Assigned COM Connected Virtual Device Allow Private Force Private Fix Frame Extension Settings: Save Directs Delete Controls

FIGURE 4-38. DEFINITION—CPU DEVICES

You can select the following buttons.

TABLE 4-33. BUTTONS

BUTTON FUNCTION
New Open a new CPU device
Delete Delete a new CPU device
Apply Confirm a created CPU device
Cancel Reject changes
> Assign selected extender units
>>Assign all available extender units
< Remove selected extender units
<<Remove all extender units

You can select the following keyboard commands.

TABLE 4-34. KEYBOARD COMMANDS

FUNCTIONKEYBOARD COMMAND
Change assignment number of EXT unit upwards<+>
Change assignment number of EXT unit downwards<->

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

To create a new CPU Device, proceed as follows:

  1. Press the New button.
  2. Select a real CPU (Create a real CPU) or a virtual CPU (Create a virtual CPU) or a template of an existing CPU (Choose template).
    NOTE: A template can only be used if there is at least one existing CPU Device.
  3. Press the OK button.
  4. Determine all parameters that are relevant for the CPU.
  5. To confirm the new CPU, press the Apply button.

To access a new CPU via matrix, an assignment of one or more CPU type extender units is required. Proceed as follows:

  1. Select the new CPU in the CPU Devices list.
  2. Select one or more extenders in the Extender available list.
  3. Perform the assignment by pressing the > button. To assign all available extenders to the CPU, press the >> button.
    The assignments are displayed in the Extender assigned list.
  4. Confirm the assignment by pressing the Apply button.

To remove an extender assignment, proceed as follows:

  1. Select a CPU in the CPU Devices list.
  2. Select one or more extenders in the Extender assigned list.
  3. Remove the assignment with the < button. To remove all existing assignments, press the << button.
  4. Confirm the removal with the Apply button.

4.11 CPU GROUPS

The KVM matrix allows you to bundle the CPU Devices of a configuration into CPU groups. The groups can be used to logically or thematically subdivide the CPU Devices. As an application example, you can group all CPU Devices together that are connected to a specific matrix in a matrix grid.

The configuration of CPU groups at the same times increases the clarity of the configuration.

You have the following options to configure CPU groups:

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - CPU GROUPS - 1

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - CPU GROUPS - 2

OSD

To create and configure a CPU Group, proceed as follows:

  1. Select Configuration > CPU Devices in the main menu.
  2. Press the New Gr. button.
  3. Enter a group name into the Name field.
  4. Press the Okay button.
    The group is created now.

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

NEED HELP?

LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7

TECHNICAL

SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

To assign a CPU Device to a group, proceed as follows:

  1. Select Configuration > CPU Devices in the main menu.
  2. Select the CPU Device you want to assign to a CPU group.
  3. Select the CPU Group for the assignment in the Member of Group field using the cursor up and down keys.
  4. Press the Okay button.

The CPU Device is assigned to the CPU Group now.

Java Tool

To create and configure a CPU Group, proceed as follows:

  1. Select the CPU Groups tab in the Definition >Groups menu of the task area.
  2. Press the New Group button.

A popup window will open.

  1. Select Create a standard Group in the popup window and press Ok.
  2. Enter a group name into the Name field.

Press the Apply button. The group is created now.

To assign a CPU Device to a group, proceed as follows:

  1. Select the CPU Groups tab in the Definition >Groups menu of the task area.
  2. Select the CPU Group to be assigned with a CPU Device.
  3. Select a CPU Device in the CPU/Group available list that you want to assign to the CPU Group.
  4. Move the highlighted CPU Device to the CPU/Group assigned list.
  5. Press the Okay button.

The CPU Device is assigned to the CPU Group now.

4.12 CONSOLE SETTINGS

You have the option to perform the following console settings.

4.12.1 CON DEVICES

New CON Devices are created in this menu including access rights and assignment to extenders.

You have the following options to access the menu.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - CON DEVICES - 1

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - CON DEVICES - 2

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

NEED HELP?

LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7

TECHNICAL

SUPPORT

1.877.877.2269

You can select the following settings.

TABLE 4-35. CON DEVICES SETTINGS

FIELD SELECTION DESCRIPTION
ID Text ID of the CON Unit (see Section 4.4.2)
Name Text Name of the CON Device
Virtual Deviceactivated Create new CON Device as a virtual one
deactivated Function not active (default)
Allow User ACLactivated Allow activation of the User ACL at the local console
deactivated Function not active (default)
Force Loginactivated Force user login at this CON Device
deactivated Function not active (default)
LOS FrameactivatedWhen the video signal between source (computer, CPU) and the CPU Unit or the connection between matrix and the CON Unit is lost, an orange frame will be displayed.When switching to a CPU without video signal, a blank screen will appear surrounded by an orange frame.
deactivated Function not active (default)
Allow CPU ScanactivatedAllow a scan mode with an automatic change of the video signal for the favorite list (CPU Devices) of the respective console or a logged in user
deactivated Function not active (default)
Force CPU scanactivatedForce a scan mode with an automatic change of the video signal for the favorite list (CPU Devices) of the respective console or a logged in user
deactivated Function not active (default)
Scan Time0-99 secondsRetention period until switching to the next CPU Device
Port ModeactivatedThe favorite list will be replaced by a port list where the ports from 1-99 can be directly selected at each matrix.NOTE: The selection only works for CPU Devices and has to be made according to the switching of favorites.When using the Port Mode, CON and User favorites will be deactivated
deactivated Function not active (default)
Redundancy OFFactivated Function not active
deactivatedAutomatically switch to the second link of a connected redundant CON Unit when losing the primary link of a CPU Unit (default)

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

NEED HELP? LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7 TECHNICAL SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

OSD

- Select Configuration > CON Devices in the main menu.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - OSD - 1

text_image SubseaCON 010167832 Configuration F1:ID F2:Name F3:Next F4:Previous FS:Refresh F5:Find ESC CON Devices 03002 CON 010167832 03001 CON_01020324.7 CON Data ID : 0002 Name : CON_010167832 Virtual Device : N Allow User ACL : N Force Login : N LOS Frame : N EXT available CON assigned Allow CPU Scan : H Force CPU Scan : N Scan Time [sec]: 0 Port Mode : H Redundancy Off : N EXT assigned 010167832 033 EXT_010167832 010203247 034 EXT_01020324.7 CPU Access Control List Full access Video access No access 01002 CPU_010135668 01003 CPU_010207794 01001 CPU_016098105 01004 CPU_040811492 New R. New V. Edit Delete Switch BI

FIGURE 4-39. CONFIGURATION—CON DEVICES

You can select the following buttons.

TABLE 4-36. BUTTONS

BUTTON FUNCTION
New R. Create a real console
New V. Create a virtual console
Edit Edit an existing console
Delete Delete an existing console
Cancel Reject changes
SaveSave changes

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

NEED HELP? LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7 TECHNICAL SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.8 77.2 26 9

JAVA TOOL

- Select Definition > CON Devices in the task area.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - JAVA TOOL - 1

text_image File Edit Device Options 1 Open, Save, Reload, Cancel, Discount Activate Online Configuration: Save Online Changes Download, Upload, Monitoring Report, Device Finder, System Check, Save Status GO 20150048329_Reports1.jpg Status Control Administration Assignment System Definition EAST Units CPU Devices CON Devices User Definition - CON Devices ID Name 01 01/10 Gather 2 02 02/11 Replifier 1 03 03/14 Gather 7 04 04/13 Replifier 3 05 05/12 Replifier 2 06 06/14 Preload 1 07 07/15 Multi Pack 1 08 08/14 Replifier 4 09 09/13 Multi Pack 2 10 09/12 Multi Pack 3 11 09/11 Audio Tools 1 12 09/10 Audio Tools 2 13 09/10 Audio Tools 3 14 09/11 Audio Tools 4/11 15 09/19 Audio Tools 4/11 16 09/20 Audio Tools 4/11 17 09/21 Audio Tools 4/11 18 09/23 Audio Tools 4/11 19 09/23 Audio Tools 4/11 20 09/23 Audio Tools 4/11 21 09/25 Audio Tools 5/12 22 09/25 Audio Tools 5/12 23 09/26 Audio Tools 4/20/26 24 09/27 Audio Tools 4/20/26 25 09/28 Audio Tools 5/12 CON Assigned COM Connected CPU Connected Virtual Device Red. CPU Connected Alive User ACL Force Logic Speed Frame Redundancy PCIe Time (sec) Port Mode External Assignment: CPU Access Control: Favorites: Macros External parameters: ID Name Pref.

ID Name Pref.

01 10220766 06 LPT-8H-3 05

ID Name Pref.

02 03 04 05 06 07 08 44 Configuration: Cncl Settings for... Save Connection: Cncl Control: Cancel

FIGURE 4-40. DEFINITION—CON DEVICES

You can select the following buttons.

TABLE 4-37. BUTTONS

BUTTON FUNCTION
New Open a new CON device
Delete Delete a new CON device
Apply Confirm a created CON device
Cancel Reject changes
> Assign selected extender units
>> Assign all available extender units
< Remove the selected extender units
<< Remove all extender units

You can select the following keyboard commands.

TABLE 4-38. KEYBOARD COMMANDS

FUNCTIONKEYBOARD COMMAND
Decrease assignment number of EXT unit<->
Increase assignment number of EXT unit<->

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

To create a new console, proceed as follows:

  1. Press the New button.
  2. Select a real console (Create a real Console) or a virtual console (Create a virtual Console) or a template of an existing console (Choose template).

NOTE: A template can only be used if there is at least one existing CON Device.

  1. Press the OK button.
  2. Determine all parameters that are relevant for the console.
  3. To confirm a created console, press the Apply button.

To run a CPU via a matrix, one or more CON Units (extender) must be assigned. To place an assignment, proceed as follows:

  1. Select the console in the CON Devices list that has to be assigned to an extender.
  2. Select the extender in the Extender available list that should be assigned to the CON.
  3. Perform the assignment by pressing the > button. To assign all available extenders to the console, press the >> button. The assignments are displayed in the Extender assigned list.
  4. Confirm the assignment by pressing the Apply button.

To remove an extender assignment, proceed as follows:

  1. Select the console in the CON Devices list to be modified.
  2. Select the extender(s) in the Extender assigned list to be removed.
  3. Remove the assignment with the < button. To remove all existing assignments, press the << button.
  4. Confirm the changes by pressing the Apply button.

To configure CPU access rights of consoles, proceed as follows:

  1. Select a console in the CON Devices list.
  2. Open the CPU Access Control tab.
  3. Assign new access rights by using the right mouse button or the respective keyboard commands.
  4. Confirm the configuration by pressing the Apply button.

You can select the following keyboard commands.

TABLE 4-39. KEYBOARD COMMANDS

FUNCTION KEYBOARD COMMAND
Add CPU to Full Access list
Add CPU to Video Access list
Add CPU to No Access list

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

NEED HELP? LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7 TECHNICAL SUPPORT

1.87 7.87 7.22 6 9

4.12.2 MOUSE AND KEYBOARD

The OSD configuration for mouse and keyboard is made in this menu.

You have the following options to access the menu.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - MOUSE AND KEYBOARD - 1

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - MOUSE AND KEYBOARD - 2

You can select the following settings.

TABLE 4-40. MOUSE AND KEYBOARD SETTINGS

FIELD SELECTION DESCRIPTION
Hor. Speed 1/x1-9Adjustment of the horizontal mouse speed, 1 = slow, 9 = fast (default value: 4)
Ver. Speed 1/x1-9Adjustment of the vertical mouse speed, 1 = slow, 9 = fast (default value: 5)
Double Click100-800Adjustment of the time slot for a double click (default value: 200 ms)
Keyboard layoutRegionSet the OSD keyboard layout according to the used keyboard (default: German [DE])
Video ModeVariable or specific resolutionResolution that is used when opening OSD

NOTE: The mouse and keyboard settings are console specific and can be set separately for each console.

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

NEED HELP?

LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7

TECHNICAL

SUPPORT

1.87 7.87 7.226 9

OSD

- Select Configuration > EXT Units in the main menu.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - OSD - 1

text_image odainRCON-B10167832 Configuration F1:ID F2:Name F3:Next F4:Previous FS:Refresh FS:Find ESC EXI Units 010135668 EXI_010135668 010167832 EXI_010167832 010203247 EXT_010203247 010207794 EXT_010207794 016090105 EXT_016090105 040011492 EXT_040011492 EXI Data ID : 10135668 Name : EXT_010135668 CPU/CON assigned OIONS CPU-010207794 Fixed : N Port 1/2 : 11 /8 Universal : N General OSD Data Horizontal mouse speed [1/x]: 4 Vertical mouse speed [1/x]: 5 Double click time [ms]: 200 Keyboard layout : German OE_129 Video mode : variable Extender OSD Data Enable CPU selection : N Enable connection info : N Update connection info : N Display time [sec]: 0 Horizontal position : 0 Vertical position : 0 EXT Type Input Signals CM1 CM2 Output Signals CM1 CM2 DVI/VGA-CPU (video ..) V N DVI/VGA-CON (video ..) N N HID-CON (keyb.. mouse..) N N HID-CPU (keyb.. mouse..) V N Audio (analog. digital) N N Radio (analog. digital) N N RS232 (serial ..) N N RS232 (serial ..) N N USB-CON (embedded) N N USB-CPU (embedded) N N USB-CON (standalone) N N USB-CPU (standalone) N N Universal-CON H N Universal-CPU H N Cascade-CON H N Cascade-CPU H N New Edit Edit Off Switch On

FIGURE 4-41. DEFINITION—EXT UNITS

You can select the following buttons.

TABLE 4-41. BUTTONS

BUTTON FUNCTION
Cancel Reject changes
Save Save changes

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

NEED HELP?

LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7

TECHNICAL

SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

JAVA TOOL

- Select Configuration > EXT Units in the task area.

NOTE: Mouse and keyboard settings are made in the OSD Data tab.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - JAVA TOOL - 1

text_image COM Engine User 2 Open, Save, Reload, Connect, Disconnect, Activate Online Configuration, Save Online Changes, Download, Upload, Monitoring, Report, Device Finder, System Check, Save Status. GO EXE CONSERV. Reported IP Status Control Administration Assignment System Definition EXT Units CPU/Device CON/Device User Definition - EXT Units ID Name COM Assigned Name COM10000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 P ID Name COM Assigned Prest Fixed Extender Type Firmware Version General CMD Data Extended CMD Data Horizontal Mouse Speed (%) Vertical House Speed (%) Double Click Time (ms) Keyboard Layout Video Block 46 46 46 46 46 46 46 46 46 46 46 46 46 46 46 46 46 46 46 46 46 46 46 46 46 46 46 46 46 46 46 46 46 46

FIGURE 4-42. DEFINITION—EXT UNITS

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

4.12.3 EXTENDER OSD

In this menu, the settings for the Extender OSD can be adjusted. These are local settings that can be made individually for each console.

You can select the following Extender OSD settings.

TABLE 4-42. EXTENDER OSD SETTINGS

FIELD SELECTION DESCRIPTION
Enable CPU Selection ListactivatedWhen executing the key sequence for opening the OSD, a selection list for switching CPU Devices will be displayed in the center of the monitor. Pressing thebutton within the selection list opens the standard OSD.
deactivated Function not active (default)
Enable Connection Infoactivated Enable Extender OSD (default: YES)
deactivated Function not active
Update Connection Infoactivated Update connection changes during fade-in of Extender OSD (default: YES)
deactivated Function not active
Display Time0–999 secondsDuration of OSD fade-in (default: 10)
Horizontal Position10 pixelsHorizontal OSD position (default: -2)
Vertical Position10 pixelsVertical OSD position (default: 2)

NOTE: When setting the horizontal OSD position, a prefixed minus describes the orientation to the right edge of the monitor, e.g. -2 means 2 × 10 = 20 pixels to this edge. When setting a vertical position, a prefixed minus describes the orientation to the bottom edge of the monitor.

If the Update Connections function is deactivated, the Extender OSD only appears when switching via OSD.

You have the following options to access the menu.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - EXTENDER OSD - 1

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - EXTENDER OSD - 2

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

NEED HELP? LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7 TECHNICAL SUPPORT

1.87 7.8 7 7.2 26 9

OSD

- Select Configuration > EXT Units in the main menu.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - OSD - 1

text_image adminRCON 010167832 Configuration F1:ID F2:Name F3:Next F4:Previous F5:Refresh F6:Find ESC EXI Units 010135568 EXI_01016568 010167832 EXI_010167832 010203247 EXI_010203247 010207794 EXI_010207794 016090105 EXI_016090105 040011492 EXI_040011492 EXI Data ID : 10135668 CPU/CON assigned Name : EXI_010135668 01003 CPU_010207794 Fixed : N Port 1/2 : [1 /2] Universal : N General OSD Data Horizontal mouse speed [1/xl] : 4 Vertical mouse speed [1/xl] : 5 Double click time [sec] : 200 Keyboard Layout German OE_129 Video mode variable Extender OSD Data Enable CPU selection : N Enable connection info : N Update connection info : N Display time [sec] : 0 Horizontal position : D Vertical position : D EXT Type Input Signals CM1 CM2 Output Signals CM1 CM2 DVI/VGA-CPU (video ..) V H DVI/VGA-CON (video ..) H N HID-CON (keyb.. mouse..) H HID-CPU (keyb.. mouse..) V H Audio (analog, digital) H Audio (analog, digital) H N RS232 (serial ..) H RS232 (serial ..) USB-CON (embedded) H USB-CPU (embedded) H N USB-CON (standalone) H USB-CPU (standalone) H N Universal-CON H Universal-CPU H N Cascade-CON H Cascade-CPU H N New Edit Delete Control Reset SWITCH 01

FIGURE 4-43. CONFIGURATION—EXT UNITS

To change the Extender OSD settings, proceed as follows:

  1. Select the console extender in the EXT Units list whose Extender OSD settings has to be adjusted.
  2. When confirming the selection by pressing , the respective console extender will be enabled for editing.

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

NEED HELP? LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7 TECHNICAL SUPPORT

1.87 7.87 7.226 9

JAVA TOOL

- Select Definition >EXT Units in the task area.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - JAVA TOOL - 1

text_image File Edit Device Options 2 Open Save Restart Cancel Discount Advertise Online Configuration Save Online Changes Download Upload Monitoring Report Device Finder System Check Save Status... JF 2015E00063208_Report1.jsp Status Control Administration Assignment System Definition EXT Units CPU Devices CON Devices User ID Name COM Assigned COM Assignment Start Date: 2015.00.00 Port: Fixed Extenser Type Formative Version General OHD Data Extenser OHD Data Enable Connection Info Update Connection Info Enable CPU Selection Display Time (sec) Horizontal Position [70 pc] Vertical Position [70 pc] OHD Position Results OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK Okn OK Okn OK Okn OK Okn OK Okn OK Okn OK Okn OK Okn OK Okn OK Okn OK Okn OK Okn OK Okn OK Okn OK Okn OK Okn OK Okn OK Okn OK Okn OK Okn OK Okn OK Okn OK Okn OK Okn OK Okn OK Okn ON/OFF/ON/OFF/ON/OFF/ON/OFF/ON/OFF/ON/OFF/ON/OFF/ON/OFF/ON/OFF/ON/OFF/ON/OFF/ON/OFF/ON/OFF/ON/OFF/ON/OFF/ON/OFF/ON/OFF/ON/OFF/ON/OFF/ON/OFF/ON/OFF/ON/OFF/ON/OFF/ON/OFF/ON/OFF/ON/OFF/ OK Okn OK Okn OK Okn OK Okn OK Okn OK Okn OK Okn OK Okn OK Okn OK Okn OK Okn OK Okn OK Okn OK Okn OK Okn OK Okn OK Okn OK Okn OK Okn OK Okn OK Okn OK Okn OK Okn OK Okn OK Okn OK Okn OK Okn OK Okn OK Okn OK Okn OK Okn OK Okn OK Okn OK Okn OK

FIGURE 4-44. DEFINITION—EXT UNITS

To change the Extender OSD settings, proceed as follows:

  1. Select the console extender in the EXT Units list for which the Extender OSD settings are to be adjusted.
  2. Open the Extender OSD Data tab.
  3. Adjust the desired settings and confirm your changes by pressing the Apply button.

4.12.4 FAVORITE LIST CONSOLES

Individual favorite lists of CPUs to be switched frequently can be created for all consoles in this menu. A favorite list can contain up to 16 different CPUs.

The switching of the favorites is done via hotkey using the keyboard (see Section 5.1.1).

You have the following options to access the menu.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - FAVORITE LIST CONSOLES - 1

text_image OSD JAVA

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

NEED HELP? LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7 TECHNICAL SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.8 77.2 26 9

OSD

- Select Assignments > CON Favorites in the main menu.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - OSD - 1

text_image admin&COM_010148887 CON Favorites F1:ID F2:Name F3:Next F4:Previous F5:Refresh F6:Find ESC CPU Devices 01000 CPU_010129182 01005 CPU_010129232 01001 CPU_010148585 01003 CPU_05 02000 VCPU_02000 02001 VCPU_02001 Favorites/CPU Data CON Device 0900S CON_010148867 CON Favorites 1 01008 CPU_06 2 01009 CPU_010129390 3 01007 CPU_03 4 01006 CPU_04 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 CPU device 01006 CPU_04 CPU assigned CON connected Status EXT list Cancel Okay Use key to add a CPU to your list SWITCH 01

FIGURE 4-45. ASSIGNMENTS—CON FAVORITES

To create a favorite list for your own console, proceed as follows:

  1. Select a CPU to be moved to the favorite list on the CPU Devices list. Press to move a CPU Device to the favorite list. Press to remove a CPU from the favorite list.
  2. The order of the CPU devices within the favorite list can be changed by pressing <+> and <->.
  3. Press the Save button to save the settings.

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

NEED HELP? LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7 TECHNICAL SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

JAVA TOOL

- Select the user in the working area of the CON Devices menu for the favorite list and open the Favorites tab.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - JAVA TOOL - 1

text_image File List Device Editor Open... Save Rated Comment Connect Adjust Online Configuration Save Online Changes Download... Upload... Monitoring Reported Device Finder... System Check... Save Status... #20103268 COM Report ID Status Control Administration Assignment System Definition EST Units CPU Devices COM Conduct User Definition - COM Devices ID Name COM Assigned Name Multiplane RTL CPU Connected Virtual Device Real CPU Connected Alive (User ACL) Alive CPU Scan Force Loop Force CPU Scan LOS Frame Scal Time [sec] Redundancy Port Mode Reserved Assignment CPU Access Control Facilities Machine COM Services Name Name 01 1001 Project Info 02 1002 Project Info 03 1003 64-02.25.09 04 1004 64-02.26.09 05 1005 64-03.28.09 06 1006 64-03.29.10 07 1007 64-03.30.11 08 1008 64-03.31.12 09 1009 64-03.32.13 10 1010 64-03.33.14 11 1011 64-03.34.15 12 1012 64-03.35.16 13 1013 64-03.36.17 14 1014 64-03.37.18 15 1015 64-03.38.19 16 1016 64-03.39.20 17 1017 64-04.00.21 18 1018 64-04.01.22 19 1019 64-04.02.23 20 1020 64-04.03.24 21 1021 64-04.04.25 22 1022 64-04.05.26 23 1023 64-04.06.27 24 1024 64-04.07.28 25 1025 64-04.08.29 26 1026 64-04.09.30 27 1027 64-05.00.31 28 1028 64-05.01.32 29 1029 64-05.02.33 30 1030 64-05.03.34 31 1031 64-05.04.35 32 1032 64-05.05.36 33 1033 64-05.06.37 34 1034 64-05.07.38 35 1035 64-05.08.39 36 1036 64-05.09.40 37 1037 64-06.00.41 38 1038 64-06.01.42 39 1039 64-06.02.43 40 1040 64-06.03.44 41 1041 64-06.04.45 42 1042 64-06.05.46 43 1043 64-06.06.47 44 1044 64-06.07.48 45 1045 64-06.08.49 46 1046 64-06.09.50 47 1047 64-07.00.51 48 1048 64-07.01.52 49 1049 64-07.02.53 50 1050 64-07.03.54 51 1051 64-07.04.55 52 1052 64-07.05.56 53 1053 64-07.06.57 54 1054 64-07.07.58 55 1055 64-07.08.59 56 1056 64-07.09.60 57 1057 64-08.00.61 58 1058 64-08.01.62 59 1059 64-08.02.63 60 1060 64-08.03.64 61 1061 64-08.04.65 62 1062 64-08.05.66 63 1063 64-08.06.67 64 1OCA Server Control Facilities Machine

FIGURE 4-46. DEFINITION—CON DEVICES

To create a favorite list for any console, proceed as follows:

  1. Select the CPUs in the CPU available list that should be added to the favorite list (CPU assigned). At the same time, multiple CPU Devices can be marked by pressing and holding .
  2. Press the > button to move the marked CPU Devices to the favorite list. If you press the >> button, the first eight CPU Devices from the list will be moved to the favorite list (CPU assigned).
  3. To change the order of marked CPU Devices within the favorite list, press <+> and <->.
  4. To remove marked CPU Devices from the favorite list, press the < button. If you press the << button, all CPU Devices will be removed from the favorite list.

4.12.5 CONSOLE MACROS

In this menu, macro commands for switching, disconnection or user administration can be created. The macro commands are created for each console separately.

A macro can execute up to 16 switching commands successively.

The execution of the macros is done via hotkey and the function keys - (see Section 5.1.3).

You can select the following settings.

TABLE 4-43. CONSOLE MACROS SETTINGS

FIELD SELECTION DESCRIPTION
Function (01-16)Connect(P1=CON, P2=CPU)Set bidirectional connection from console P1 to CPU P2
Connect Video(P1=CON, P2=CPU)Set video connection from console P1 to CPU P2
Disconnect (P1=CON) Disconnect console P1
Logout User Logout current user
Set Real CPU(P1=VCPU, P2=RCPU)Assign a virtual CPU to a real CPU
Set Virtual CON(P1=RCON, P2=VCON)Assign a real console to a virtual console
Push (P1=CON)The user's KVM connection is forwarded to console P1 and is changed to a video only connection.
Push Video (P1=CON)The video signal of the current connection (KVM or video only) is forwarded to console P1. The user's connection remains unchanged (KVM or video only).
Get (P1=CON)The console gets a KVM connection to the CPU that is currently connected to console P1. The connection of console P1 is changed into a video only connection.
Get Video (P1=CON)The console gets a video only connection to the CPU that is currently connected to console P1. The connection of console P1 remains unchanged (KVM or video only).
Login User Login a certain user P1 at console P2
P1 CON or CPU DeviceName of CON or CPU Device
P2CPU or CPU DeviceName of CPU or CPU Device

You have the following options to access the menu.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - CONSOLE MACROS - 1

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - CONSOLE MACROS - 2

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

NEED HELP?

LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7

TECHNICAL

SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.8 77.2 26 9

OSD

- Select via Configuration > CON Macros in the main menu the console for which a console macro is to be created.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - OSD - 1

text_image 03000 CON_010125349 - admin Configuration F1:10 F2:Name F3:Next F4:Previous F5:Refresh F6:Find ESC CON devices 03000 CON_010125349 CON Macros Key : F01 Parameter #1 Parameter #2 Connect 03000 CON_010125349 01001 CPU_010135060 Disconnect 03000 CON_010125349 Macro Data Function CON Devices not used Disconnect Actual CON device Parameter #1 03000 CON_010125349 Parameter #2 Edit Delete Cancel Okay SWITCH 01

FIGURE 4-47. CONFIGURATION—CON MACROS

To create a macro for the selected console, proceed as follows:

  1. Select in the Key field the function key (F1-F16) for which a macro should be created.
  2. Select the respective place on the list (1-16) the key that should be set with a macro key.
  3. Select for the highlighted position on the list a macro command in the Macro Data field.
  4. Set the necessary parameters P1 and P2 (e.g. CON Devices or CPU Devices) for the selected macro command.
  5. Confirm your inputs by pressing and repeat the process for further macro commands, if necessary.

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

JAVA TOOL

- Select the console in the working area of the Definition > CON Devices menu for which a macro has to be created and open the Macros tab.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - JAVA TOOL - 1

text_image COM-UP Device Options Open... Save Refresh Command Download Activate Online Configuration Save Online Changes Download Upload Monitoring Report Device Printer System Check Save Status Definition - COM Devices Status Control Administration Assignment System Definition EQT Units CPU/Devices COM Devices User ID Name GO COM Assigned Name Database ID1 CPU Connected Virtual Device Word, CPU Connected Alive User ACS Alive CPU Scan Force Logis Force CPU Scan LOS Image Scan Time (ms) Redoability Port Mode Connect Response CPU Access Control Functions Measures Key F1 Functions F1 F2 01 Continued F1+DCN F1+CPU CPU10000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 02 Continued S16C F1+DCN F1+CPU12 S16C12: State Path 5 03 Continued Private F1+DCN F1+CPU12 S16C12: State Path 5 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 Change From: 2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2. Change From: 2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.

FIGURE 4-48. DEFINITION—CON DEVICES

To create a macro for the selected console, proceed as follows:

  1. Select in the Key field the function key (F1-F16) for which a macro has to be created.
  2. Select in the Function column the commands that should be part of the macro. The selection list will be opened by a double-click on the empty fields.
  3. Select the respective parameters for the macro functions (e.g. corresponding consoles and CPUs) in the P1 and P2 columns.
  4. Confirm your inputs by pressing the Apply button.

For an efficient macro configuration, the following context functions are available:

When clicking on the Macros tab, macros can be assigned to other consoles by using the Assign Macros to ... function and can be copied from other consoles by using the Copy Macros from ... function.

- When clicking on the macro list, macros of the selected key can be copied into the cache by using the Copy Key Macros function. You can paste the macros from the cache into a key by using the Paste Key Macros function and you can reset all macros of the selected key by using the Reset Key Macros function.

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

This menu enables shared operation of a CPU Device by two or more CON Devices. A CPU Device can be controlled by only one CON Device at a time but can be taken over successively by other CON Devices. Control of a CPU Unit by a CON Unit is relinquished after the expiration of an inactivity timer associated with the controlling CON Device. The mouse or keyboard may also be used to take control.

To allow a smooth and accurate function of the shared operation, you should use identical mice and keyboards.

They should be connected to the same USB-HID ports of each CON Unit.

The alternative is using USB-HID Ghosting (see Section 5.11).

When taking over control within 10 seconds, any assigned USB 2.0 / 3.0 extenders, if available, will not be switched because of security and stability aspects.

You have the following options to configure shared operation.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION - 1

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION - 2

OSD

- Select via Configuration > Switch in the main menu.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - OSD - 1

text_image 03000 CON 810123614 -- admin Configuration ESC Switch Enable Video Sharing : N Force Connect : N Force Disconnect : N CPU Auto Connect : N CPU Timeout : [min] : 0 Keyboard Connect : N Mouse Connect : N Release Time [sec] : 10 Offers charged video access to CPU. Allow full CPU access to CPU other commands rotate video. Allow full CPU cache to CPU disconnect other commands. Connect to send portable CPU resources onboard or mouse. Specify inactivity that at currently connected CPU after which CPU will be disconnected automatically. Enable CPU control requests by keyboard activity. Enable CPU control requests by music activity. Specify inactivity time to accept CPU control requests from other commands. Cancel Save SUTCH 01

FIGURE 4-49. CONFIGURATION-SWITCH

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

NEED HELP? LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7 TECHNICAL SUPPORT

1.877.877.2269

To configure shared operation, proceed as follows:

  1. Activate the Enable Video Sharing function.
  2. Activate the Force Connect function.
  3. Activate the Keyboard Connect function, if taking over control by a keyboard event should be possible.
  4. Activate the Mouse Connect function, if taking over control by a keyboard movement should be possible.
  5. Define a Release Time of inactivity (0–999 sec.) after which control can be taken over.

JAVA TOOL

- Select via System > Switch in the task area.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - JAVA TOOL - 1

text_image View - List Device Options Open Save Reset Connect Disconnect Activate Online Configuration Save Online Changes Download Upload Monitoring Report Device Finder System Check Save Status

PerformanceReport key

System - Switch Show Help Switch Settings Enable Video Sharing Force Connect Force Disconnect CPU Auto Connect CPU To Deal [min] Keyboard Connect Mouse Connect Release Time [sec] Enable Software access to CPU Allowable MPU/MI access to CPU, other common user value Allowable MPU/MI access to CPU, other common user value Available from available CPU, available output or request Specify availability required at currently connected CPU other than CPU and be disconnected automatically (if - downloaded) Enable CPU control requested by keyboard activity Specify availability required by mouse activity Specify availability required by other user activity Configure installed Config installed

FIGURE 4-50. SYSTEM-SWITCH

To configure shared operation, proceed as follows:

  1. Activate the Enable Video Sharing function.
  2. Activate the Force Connect function.
  3. Activate the Keyboard Connect function, if taking over control by a keyboard event is to be permitted.
  4. Activate the Mouse Connect function, if taking over control by a keyboard movement should be possible.
  5. Define a Release Time of inactivity (0 - 999 sec.) after which control can be taken over.

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

4.12.7 MULTI-SCREEN CONTROL

This menu configures the USB-HID switching operation, allowing a CON Device with several monitors to control several connected sources (computers, CPUs). Smooth switching can be performed for up to four connected sources by dragging the mouse pointer beyond the respective monitor to an adjacent one.

Monitors can be arranged side-by-side or in a grid layout.

CAUTION: When using sources (computers, CPUs) in multi-head operation (e.g. dual-head), switching only works manually via keyboard commands. Noncompliance may have a negative influence on the stability of the system.

When using CON Units with the possibility to connect a local source (computer, CPU) in a Multi-Screen Control environment, the local switching will be disabled.

NOTE: To enable Multi-Screen Control, all Extender Units assigned to the related CON Device, must be physically connected to the same block of 4 ports on the I/O board of the matrix.

CON Units that have been already configured for Multi-Screen Control can be connected together to other blocks of 4 ports. In this case, any further configuration is not necessary; their functionality will remain as set previously.

You have the following options to access the menu.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - MULTI-SCREEN CONTROL - 1

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - MULTI-SCREEN CONTROL - 2

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

OSD

- Select Assignments > Multi-Screen Control in the main menu.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - OSD - 1

text_image Multi-PCON 010125349 Multi-Screen Control ESG Arrangement • Switching Screens : 1 x 4 Manual : N Redo switching to manual switching with bootups Disable automatic switching with active (or multiseal CPUs) Screen #1 CON_010125349 Enabled : V Control : N Owner : shared Frame : 0 sec Screen #2 screen not available Enabled : N Control : N Owner : N Frame : sec Screen #3 screen not available Enabled : N Control : N Owner : N Frame : sec Screen #4 screen not available Enabled : N Control : N Owner : N Frame : sec Cancel Okay SWITCH #1

FIGURE 4-51. ASSIGNMENTS—MULTI-SCREEN CONTROL

To configure the Multi-Screen Control, proceed as follows:

  1. In the Arrangement field, select the layout for the CON Device you want to configure (1 x 4 or 2 x 2). The fields for the configuration of the individual displays will be arranged accordingly.
  2. Activate Manual option, if USB-HID switching is to be restricted to keyboard commands (see Section 5.6). Manual switching allows the use of multi-head consoles.
  3. Ensure that the Enabled option is set to Y on all displays in order to activate the respective display for Multi-Screen Control.
  4. Select one or more control displays within the CON Device by setting the Control function to Y in the display field. Control displays are referred to the extender units within the Multi-Screen Control that are connected to keyboard and mouse.
  5. When using the Owner function, you can determine which control display is permitted for USB-HID switching to the different displays. Select that display from the list. To make a display accessible to all neighboring control displays, set the Owner function to shared.
  6. Use the Frame function to configure a red frame that shows the current display with mouse control after the expiration of a selectable timer. The frame to fade in can be individually activated by using a timer >0 seconds.

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

JAVA TOOL

- Select Assignment > Multi-Screen Control in the task area.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - JAVA TOOL - 1

text_image File Edit Device Options 3 Gears... Remove Connect Download Activate Online Configuration: Save Online Changes Downloads Import Monitoring Report... Device Finder... System Clean... Save Status GO TEXT/SEM/SEM_Report1-up Assignment - Multi-Screen Controls

Block Enabled Control Screening

01 4.1 [box1, [box2], appR Multi Tech RDT 02 4.1 [box3, [box4], [box5], [box6], [box7], [box8], [box9], [box10], [box11], [box12], [box13], [box14], [box15], [box16], [box17], [box18], [box19], [box20], [box21], [box22], [box23], [box24], [box25], [box26], [box27], [box28], [box29], [box30], [box31], [box32], [box33], [box34], [box35], [box36], [box37], [box38], [box39], [box40] Administrant Name Design and Settings Denior Denior Enabled Ctrl Frame (sec) Screen 1 Name Design and Settings Denior Denior Enabled Ctrl Frame (sec) Screen 2 Name Design and Settings Denior Denior Enabled Ctrl Frame (sec) Screen 3 Name Design Denior Denior Enabled Ctrl Frame (sec) Screen 4 Name Design/Denior Denior Denior Enabled Ctrl Frame (sec) 确定 Cancel

FIGURE 4-52. ASSIGNMENTS—MULTI-SCREEN CONTROL

To configure the Multi-Screen Control, proceed as follows:

  1. Select the block of four ports in the list of the working area that should be configured for Multi-Screen Control. Only blocks of four ports that contain at least one CON Unit are shown.
  2. Activate Manual option, if the USB-HID switching is to be restricted to keyboard commands (see Section 5.6). Manual switching allows the use of multi-head consoles.
  3. In the Arrangement field, select the layout for the CON Devices you want to configure (1 x 4 or 2 x 2). The fields for the configuration of the individual displays will be arranged accordingly.
  4. Select one or more control displays within the CON Device by setting the Control function to Y in the respective display field. Control displays are referred to the extender units within the Multi-Screen Control that are connected to keyboard and mouse.
  5. When using the Owner function, you can determine which control display is permitted for USB-HID switching to the different displays. Select that display from the list. To make a display accessible for all neighboring control displays, set the Owner function to shared.
  6. Use the Frame function to configure a red frame that shows the current display with mouse control after the expiration of a selectable timer. The frame to fade-in can be individually activated by using a timer >0 seconds.

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

NEED HELP?

LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7

TECHNICAL

SUPPORT

1.8 77.8 77.2 26 9

4.12.8 ACTIVE DIRECTORY

The KVM matrix can be synchronized with the Active Directory directory service with regard to user authentication. This allows the user to login at the KVM matrix using login information from the Active Directory service.

The connection between KVM matrix and the Active Directory server is established via OpenLDAP and periodically synchronized every 5 minutes.

The integration of Active Directory is only available with the ACX288-ADCTL controller board.

You have the following options to to configure the service:

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - ACTIVE DIRECTORY - 1

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - ACTIVE DIRECTORY - 2

OSD

To configure the synchronization to the Active Directory server, proceed as follows:

  1. Create the KVMMatrixUser user group in your Active Directory domain (Active Directory setting).
  2. Add the Active Directory users to the user group who are relevant for the KVM matrix and should be able to authenticate at it. (Active Directory setting).
  3. Select an existing Active Directory bind user or create a new one (Active Directory setting).
  4. Select Configuration > Network in the main menu of the KVM matrix.
  5. Activate the LDAP function.
  6. Enter the respective IP address and port number under LDAP Server (default port number: 389)
  7. Enter the LDAP Base DN into the respective field (e.g. dc=example, dc=com).
  8. Select Configuration > User in the main menu of the KVM matrix.

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION - 1

text_image admin@CON 03 Configuration F1:ID F2:Name F3:Next FA:Previous F5:Refresh F6:Find F9:Compare ESC User List 00002 a 00001 admin 00004 power 00003 super 00005 user User Data IO/Priority : 2 A0 Group : N LDAP User/Group : N HD Synchronized : N Name : a Full Name : Password : Repeat Password : Member of Group : not assigned Administrator : V Super User : N Power User : N SNMP User : N Auto Connect : N LOAP/HD Info CPU Access Control List Full access 01001 CPU_01 01005 CPU_010196925 01004 CPU_010258167 01002 CPU_02 01003 CPU_03 01006 CPU_04 02001 VCPU_02001 02002 VCPU_02002 Video access No access New U. New G. New LU New LG Edit Delete Close Usey Techsupport_04BC

FIGURE 4-53. MENU CONFIGURATION - USER

  1. Create a new LDAP user (bind user) by pressing New LU.
  2. Enter a user name into the Name field.
  3. Enter the login name of the bind user from the Active Directory into the Login Name field.
  4. Enter the password of the bind user from the Active Directory into the Password field. The password also acts as local password, if the Active Directory service is not available.
  5. Save your settings and restart the KVM matrix.

The Active Directory users will be then synchronized with the KVM matrix and imported into its configuration.

Single Active Directory users can be subsequently imported into the KVM matrix. Thereby there is no synchronization. These single users are not subject to the Active Directory group structure. To create a user, proceed as follows:

  1. Select Configuration > User in the main menu of the matrix.
  2. Create a new LDAP user, by pressing the New LU button.
  3. Enter a user name into the Name field. At the same time, the name is the login name at the matrix if the Active Directory service is not available.
  4. Enter the complete domain name of the Active Directory user into the Login Name field (e.g. firstname.lastname@example.com).
  5. Enter the local password for the user into the Password field.
  6. Save your settings.

The Active Directory can be used now.

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

Java Tool

To configure the synchronization to the Active Directory server, proceed as follows:

  1. Perform steps 1-3 as mentioned in the OSD section.
  2. Select the tab LDAP under System > Network in the task area.
  3. Activate the LDAP function.
  4. Enter the respective IP address and port number into the LDAP Server field (default port number: 389).
  5. Enter the LDAP Base DN into the respective field (e.g. dc=example, dc=com).
  6. Select Definition > User in the task area.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - Java Tool - 1

text_image File Edit Device Express ? Open Save Reset Connect Document Activate Online Configuration Save Online Changes Download Spread Monitoring Plant System Device Folder System Check Save Status Admining 542.164.173.01 (Register C) Status Control Administration Assignment System Definition Exit Units CPU Devices CON Devices User Groups Definition - User

ID Name

01 00001 admin 02 00002 Apprvsmid 03 00003 Powersum 04 00004 user 05 00005 Server 06 00006 Home 07 00007 Administrator AD Synchronized Super User Power User SBBP User LDAP Logis Auto Connect CPU Access Control Favorites Search Full Access Name ID Name No Access CPU_00001 CPU_00002 CPU_00003 CPU_00004 CPU_00005 CPU_00006 CPU_00007 CPU_00008 CPU_00009 CPU_00010 CPU_00011 CPU_00012 CPU_00013 CPU_00014 CPU_00015 CPU_00016 CPU_00017 CPU_00018 CPU_00019 CPU_00020 CPU_00021 CPU_00022 CPU_00023 CPU_00024 CPU_00025 CPU_00026 CPU_00027 CPU_00028 CPU_00029 CPU_00030 CPU_00031 CPU_00032 CPU_00033 CPU_00034 CPU_00035 CPU_00036 CPU_00037 CPU_00038 CPU_00039 CPU_00040 CPU_00041 CPU_00042 CPU_00043 CPU_00044 CPU_00045 CPU_00046 CPU_00047 CPU_00048 CPU_00049 CPU_00050 CPU_01-12-25-25-25-25-25- C:\Users\Windows\Windows\Windows\Windows\Windows\Windows\Windows\Windows\Windows\Windows\Windows\Windows\Windows\Windows\Windows\Windows\Windows\Windows\Windows\Windows\Windows\Windows\Windows\Windows\Windows\Windows\Windows\Windows\Windows\Windows\Windows\Windows\Windows\Windows\Windows\Windows\Windows\Windows\Windows\Windows\Windows\Windows\Windows\Windows\Windows\Windows\Windows\Windows\Windows\Windows\Microsoft Windows Server Tools Help Tools Help Tools Help Tools Help Tools Help Tools Help Tools Help Tools Help Tools Help Tools Help Tools Help Tools Help Tools Help Tools Help Tools Help Tools Help Tools Help Tools Help Tools Help Tools Help Tools Help Tools Help Tools Help Tools Help Tools Help Tools Help Tools Help Tools Help Tools Help Tools Help Tools Help Tools Help Tools Help Tools Help Tools Help Tools Help Tools Help Tools Help Tools Help Tools Help Tools Help Tools Help Tools Help Tools Help Tools Help Tools Help Tools Help Tools Help Tools Help Tools Help Tools help Tools help Tools help Tools help Tools help Tools help Tools help Tools help Tools help Tools help Tools help Tools help Tools help Tools help Tools help Tools help Tools help Tools help Tools help Tools help Tools help Tools help Tools help Tools help Tools help Tools help Tools help Tools help Tools help Tools help Tools help Tools help Tools help Tools help Tools help Tools help Tools help Tools help Tools help Tools help Tools help Tools help Tools help Tools help Tools help Tools help Tools help Tools help Tools help Tcsas: 123, 123, 123, 123, 123, 123, 123, 123, 123, 123, 123, 123, 123, 123, 123, 123, 123, 123, 123, 123, 123, Average Settings As Copy Settings Break Data Active Supply Chain Control Add Light Field Service Add Light Field Service Add Light Field Service Add Light Field Service Add Light Field Service Add Light Field Service Add Light Field Service Add Light Field Service Add Light Field Service Add Light Field Service Add Light Field Service Add Light Field Service Add Light Field Service Add Light Field Service Add Light Field Service Add Light Field Service Add Light Field Service Add Light Field Service Add Light Field Service Add Light Field Service Add Light Field Service Add Light Field Service Add Light Field Service Add Light Field Service Add Light Field Service Add Light FieldService Add Light Field Service Add Light Field Service Add Light Field Service Add Light Field Service Add Light Field Service Add Light Field Service Add Light Field Service Add Light Field Service Add Light Field Service Add Light Field Service Add Light Field Service Add Light Field Service Add Light Field Service Add Light Field Service Add Light Field Service Add Light Field Service Add Light Field Service Add Light Field Service Add Light Field Service Add Light Field Service Add Light Field Service Add Light Field Service Add Light Field Service Add Light Field Service Add Light Field service Add Light Field service Add Light Field service Add Light Field service Add Light Field service Add Light Field service Add Light Field service Add Light Field service Add Light Field service Add Light Field service Add Light Field service Add Light Field service Add Light Field service Add Light Field service Add Light Field service Add Light Field service Add Light Field service Add Light Field service Add Light Field service Add Light Field service Add Light Field service Add Light Field service Add Light Field service Add Light Field service Add Light Field service Add Light Field Service Add Light Field service Add Light Field service Add Light Field service Add Light Field service Add Light Field service Add Light Field service Add Light Field service Add Light Field service Add Light Field service Add Light Field service Add Light Field service Add Light Field service Add Light Field service Add Light Field service Add Light Field service Add Light Field service Add Light Field service Add Light Field service Add Light Field service Add Light Field service Add Light Field service Add Light Field service Add Light Field service Add Light Field Service Add Light Field Service Add Light Field service Add Light Field service Add Light Field service Add Light Field service Add Light Field service Add Light Field service Add Light Field service Add Light Field service Add Light Field service Add Light Field service Add Light Field service Add Light Field service Add Light Field service Add Light Field service Add Light Field service Add Light Field service Add Light Field service Add Light Field service Add Light Field service Add Light Field service Add Light Field service Add Light Field service Add Light Field Service Add Light Field service Add light field service add light field service add light field service add light field service add light field service add light field service add light field service add light field service add light field service add light field service add light field service add light field service add light field service add light field service add light field service add light field service add light field service add light field service add light field service add light field service add light field service add light field service add light field service add light field service add light field service add light field service added light field service add light field service add light field service add light field service add light field service add light field service add light field service add light field service add light field service add light field service add light field service add light field service add light field service add light field service add light field service add light field service add light field service add light field service add light field service add light field service add light field service add light field service add light field service add light field service add light field serviceAdd light field servicesAdd light field servicesAdd light field servicesAdd light field servicesAdd light field servicesAdd light field servicesAdd light field servicesAdd light field servicesAdd light field servicesAdd light field servicesAdd light field servicesAdd light field servicesAdd light field servicesAdd light field servicesAdd light field servicesAdd light field servicesAdd light field servicesAdd light field servicesAdd light field servicesAdd light field servicesAdd light field servicesAdd light field servicesAdd light field servicesAdd light field servicesAdd light field servicesAdd light field server + - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Implementation AD Synchronized Parameters Super User Power User SBBP User LDAP Logis Auto Connect Full Access Other Favorites Search Name ID Name ID Name ID Name ID Name ID Name ID Name ID Name ID Name ID Name ID Name ID Name ID Name ID Name ID Name ID Name ID Name ID Name ID Name ID Name ID Name ID Name ID Name ID Name ID Name ID Name ID Name ID Name ID Name ID Name ID Name ID Name ID Name ID Name ID Name ID Name ID Name ID Name ID Name ID Name ID Name ID Name ID Name ID Name ID Name ID Name ID Name ID Name ID Name ID Name ID Name ID NAME ID NAME ID NAME ID NAME ID NAME ID NAME ID NAME ID NAME ID NAME ID NAME ID NAME ID NAME ID NAME ID NAME ID NAME ID NAME ID NAME ID NAME ID NAME ID NAME ID NAME ID NAME ID NAME ID NAME ID NAME ID NAME ID NAME ID NAME ID NAME ID NAME ID NAME ID NAME ID NAME ID NAME ID NAME ID NAME ID NAME ID NAME ID NAME ID NAME ID NAME ID NAME ID NAME ID NAME ID NAME ID NAME ID NAME ID NAME ID NAME ID NAME ID \|N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N=N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N= N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =M =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =N =NG

FIGURE 4-54. MENU CONFIGURATION - USER CONFIGURATION

  1. Create a new LDAP user (bind user) by pressing the New User button.
    A popup window will appear.
  2. Select Create a LDAP User in the popup window.
  3. Enter a user name into the Name field.
  4. Enter the login name of the bind user from the Active Directory into the Login Name field.
  5. Enter the password of the bind user from the Active Directory into the Password field. The password also acts as local password, if the Active Directory service is not available.
  6. Save your settings and restart the KVM matrix.

The Active Directory users will be then synchronized with the KVM matrix and imported into its configuration.

Single Active Directory users can be subsequently imported into the KVM matrix. Thereby there is no synchronization. These single users are not subject to the Active Directory group structure. To create a user, proceed as follows:

  1. Select the tab LDAP under System > User in the task area.
  2. Create a new LDAP user by pressing the New User button.

A popup window will appear.

  1. Select Create a LDAP User in the popup window.

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

  1. Enter the complete domain name of the Active Directory user into the Login Name field (e.g. firstname.lastname@example.com).
  2. Enter a local password into the Password field.
  3. Save your settings.

The Active Directory can be used now.

4.13 SAVING AND LOADING CONFIGURATIONS

You have the option to set the following administration of configurations.

4.13.1 ACTIVE CONFIGURATION

You have the following option to access the menu.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - ACTIVE CONFIGURATION - 1

- Select Configuration > Save in the main menu.

By selecting this menu item, the active configuration of the matrix is saved to the permanent matrix memory. By default, the last configuration that has been saved in this way will be restored after a restart of the matrix.

NOTE: Changing or saving configurations blocks the matrix memory and leads to a freeze of all OSD menus for a few seconds. The switching connections are not affected by this freeze.

If you select Auto Save within the system settings, an additional automatic saving of the configuration will be periodically performed (see Secton 4.3.2).

4.13.2 SAVING CONFIGURATION (INTERNAL)

In this menu, the current matrix configuration is saved to predefined storage locations. However, it does not replace the buffering of configuration (see Section 4.12.1).

You have the following options to access the menu.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - SAVING CONFIGURATION (INTERNAL) - 1

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - SAVING CONFIGURATION (INTERNAL) - 2

In Active, the name and detailed information of the current configuration are shown. This configuration can be saved.

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

NEED HELP? LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7 TECHNICAL SUPPORT

1.8 77.8 77.2269

In Default and File #1 to File #8, the name and detailed information of the respective saved configuration are shown. These storage locations can be overwritten.

The storage location to be overwritten by the current configuration must be selected explicitly.

The current configuration will be saved to this storage location and will be shown immediately in the menu. The previously saved configuration saved to this storage location is deleted.

OSD

You have the possibility to save the created configuration within eight storage locations in the matrix (File #1 - File #8). Additionally, a configuration can also be saved as default configuration.

  1. Select Configuration > Save As... in the main menu.
  2. Select the required storage location (File #1 - File #8) or Default.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - OSD - 1

text_image 03000 CON 010123614 - admin Configuration Save as... Active : Default File #1 File #2 File #3 File #4 File #5 File #6 File #7 File #8

FIGURE 4-55. CONFIGURATION—SAVE AS

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

NEED HELP? LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7 TECHNICAL SUPPORT

1.8 77.8 77.2 26 9

JAVA TOOL

To save the configuration into the matrix memory, proceed as follows:

  1. Select File > Upload in the menu bar.
  2. Enter the IP address of the matrix, your user name and your password and press the Next button to confirm your inputs.
  3. Select the storage location where the configuration will be saved (default or config01-config08) and press the OK button to confirm.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - JAVA TOOL - 1

text_image File Edit Device Echo 1 Open Save Remind Correct Document Activate Online Configuration Save Online Changes Download Upload Monitoring Request Device Folder System Check Save Status... System - System Data General Automatic ID Show Help Device Name Network Steps Connect 1. Connect 2. Select Configuration Slot Host Name: IP Address 902 168 168 217 Name username Sub-Mix Password Load O Auto St Enable Enable Enable Syncerption Syncerization status with master name Extra Only Syncerization status with active ring Master IP Address Get the current address at the master name Enabled IO Boards Defaulted by OFF during operation, enable during main pipeline only Cancel Cancel

FIGURE 4-56. FILE-UPLOAD

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

NEED HELP? LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7 TECHNICAL SUPPORT

1.8 77.8 77.2 26 9

4.13.3 LOADING CONFIGURATION (INTERNAL)

Previously saved configurations are loaded in this menu.

You have the following options to load configurations from files.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - LOADING CONFIGURATION (INTERNAL) - 1

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - LOADING CONFIGURATION (INTERNAL) - 2

In Active, the currently loaded configuration is displayed.

In addition to the default configuration, up to eight further configurations can be loaded.

The selection of the configuration to be loaded can be made between eight personalizable configurations and the default settings.

The selected configuration is immediately loaded and displayed in the menu as Active. The previously active configuration is deleted.

OSD

  1. Select Configuration > Open in the main menu.
  2. Select the desired configuration.
  3. Load the configuration by pressing .

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - OSD - 1

text_image 03000 CON 010123614 - admin Configuration Open... Active : Default File #1 File #2 File #3 File #4 File #5 File #6 File #7 File #8 SWITCH 01

FIGURE 4-57. CONFIGURATION—OPEN

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

NEED HELP? LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7 TECHNICAL SUPPORT

1.87 7.87 7.2 26 9

JAVA TOOL

  1. Select Administration > Activate Configuration during online mode in the task area.
  2. Select the desired configuration.
  3. Load the configuration by pressing the Activate button.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - JAVA TOOL - 1

text_image File Edit Device Entries 2 Open Save Reset Connect Document Activate Online Configuration Save Online Changes Download Upload Monitoring Report Device Finder System Check Save Status © 2015030808208_Regel11.csc Status Control Administration Update Status Formware Update EXT Formware Indicate Configuratiol Miscellaneous Assignment System Definition Administration - Activate Configuration Active Configuration Name Page 1 Info 441000 File Name Info IP Address Version Default (default) Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Default (default) Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Default (default) Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Default (default) Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Default (default) Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Default (default) Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Default (default) Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Default (default) Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Default (default) Page 1 Page 1 Default (default) Page 1 Default (default) Page 2 Default (default) Page 2 Default (default) Page 2 Default (default) Page 2 Default (default) Page 2 Default (default) Page 2 Default (default) Page 2 Default (default) Page 2 Default (default) Page 2 Default (default) Page 2 Default (default) Page 2 Default (default) Page 2 Default (default) Page 2 Default (standard) Default (standard) Default (standard) Default (standard) Default (standard) Default (standard) Default (standard) Default (standard) Default (standard) Default (standard) Default (standard) Default (standard) Default (standard) Default (standard) Default (standard) Default (standard) Default (standard) Default (standard) Default (standard) Default (standard) Default (standard) Default (standard) Default (standard) Default (standard) Default (standard) Default (standard)

FIGURE 4-58. ADMINISTRATION-ACTIVATE CONFIGURATION

4.13.4 SAVING CONFIGURATIONS (EXTERNAL)

Configurations can be saved as files that can be stored independent of the matrix.

You have the following option to access the menu.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - SAVING CONFIGURATIONS (EXTERNAL) - 1

  1. Select File > Save As in the menu bar.
  2. Enter a name for the configuration.
  3. Select the directory of the configuration on your storage medium where it is to be saved.

NOTE: Configurations are always saved in a file with the ending dtc.

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

NEED HELP? LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7 TECHNICAL SUPPORT

1.8 77.8 77.2 26 9

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION - 1

text_image Eire Data Options 2 Open, Save, Active, Connect, Document, Activate Online Configuration, Save Online Changes, Download, Upload, Monitoring, Report, Device Prefix, System Check, Save Status... System - System Data Command: Automatic ID Show Help Device Name: Info: Sub Matrix: Load Default: Auto Save: Enable COM Echo: Enable LAD Echo: Enable Redundancy: Synchronization: Echo Only: Worker IP Address: Install IO Boards: Key value: 0.0001 (accessed) (unselected) (default) or (A,B,C,D,E,F,G,H,I,J,K,L,M,N,O,P,Q,R,S,T,U,V,W,X,Y,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,Z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z,z-z,k,l,m,n,o,r,s,v,t,v,w,v,y,v,x,y,v,y,v,x,y,v,y,v,x,y,v,x,y,v,x,y,v,x,y,v,x,y,v,x,y,v,x,y,v,x,y,v,x,y,v,x,y,v,x,y,v,x,y,v,x,y,v,x,y,v,x,y,v,x,y,v,x,y,v,x,y,v,x,y,v,x,y,v,x,y,v,x,y,v,x,y,v,x,y,v,x,y,v,x,y,v,x,y,v,x,y,v,x,y,v,x,y,v,x,y,v,x,y,v,x,y,v,x,Y,a,b,c,d,e,f,g,h,i,j,k,l,m,m,n,o,r,s,v,t,v,w,v,y,v,x,v,x,v,y,v,x,y,v,x,y,v,x,y,v,x,y,v,x,y,v,x,y,v,x,y,v,x,y,v,x,y,v,x,y,v,x,y,v,x,y,v,x,y,v,x,y,v,x,y,v,x,y,v,x,y,v,x,y,v,x,y,v,x,y,v,x,y,v,x,y,v,x,y,v,x,y,v,x,y,v,x,y,v,x,y,v,x,y,v,x,y,v,x,y,v,x,y,v,x,y,v,u,k,l,m,n,o,r,s,v,t,v,w,v,y,v,x,v,k,l,m,n,o,r,s,v,t,v,w,v,y,v,x,v,k,l,m,n,o,r,s,v,t,v,w,v,y,v,x,v,k,l,m,n,o,r,sv,t,v,w,v,y,v,x,v,k,l,m,n,o,r,sv,t,v,w,v,y,v,x,v,k,l,m,n,o,r,sv,t,v,w,v,y,v,x,v,k,l,m,n,o,r,sv,t,v,w,v,y,v,x,v,k,l,m,n,o,r,sv,t,v,w,v,y,v,x,v,k,l,m,n,o,r,sv,t,v,w,v,y,v,x,v,k,l,m,n,o,r,sv,t,v,w,\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nSystem - System Data Command: Automatic ID Show Help Device Name: Name Info: Sub Matrix: Load Default: Auto Save: Enable COM Echo: Enable LAD Echo: Enable Redundancy: Synchronization: Echo Only: Worker IP Address: Install IO Boards:

FIGURE 4-59. FILE—SAVE AS

4.13.5 LOADING CONFIGURATIONS (EXTERNAL)

Externally saved configurations are opened and activated in this menu.

You have the following option to load configurations from files.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - LOADING CONFIGURATIONS (EXTERNAL) - 1

  1. Select File > Open... during offline mode and select the storage location of the configuration file that has to be opened.
  2. Open the configuration by pressing the Open button.
  3. Select File > Upload in the menu bar to transfer the opened configuration to the matrix. Enter the necessary parameters.
  4. Select Matrix > Connect in the menu bar to make a connection between the matrix and the Java tool. Enter the necessary parameters.
  5. Select Administration > Activate Configuration and select the configuration to be activated.
  6. Confirm the process with the Activate button.
    The opened configuration is activated.

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

NEED HELP? LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7 TECHNICAL SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION - 1

text_image File Edit Device Options Gains New Current Document Activate Online Configuration Save Online Changes Download Upload Monitoring Report Device Finder System Check Save Status UPR10103010000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 System - System Data General Automatic C: Device Project1 Sub-Case (or selected) environment (unselected) algorithms, but 4.2.1.9.1. Name Project1 Name of current data configurations Info Local pin RECOVERY (C:) Data Inventory Sub Matrix Load Default Auto Save Enable COM Echo File Name Place of Type: 7 bits Open Cancel Enable List Echo Enable Reversistency Enable outputting matching for selected elements. Synchronization Subthreshold matrix with user rights. Echo Only Subthreshold matrix with input rights. Master IP Address Set the version address of the master name. Enabled XO Boards Additional to DPT Active Operations, create listing matrix settings into Configure Cancel Config reloaded

FIGURE 4-60. FILE—OPEN

4.14 EXPORT AND IMPORT OPTIONS

The Modular KVM Matrix Switch offers the ability to read out available configuration lists (extender, CPUs, consoles and users) for export and import again via Java tool. You have the following option to handle configuration lists.

Exported configuration lists are always saved in .csv format that allows offline editing with common spreadsheet applications.

You have the following option to export or import configuration lists:

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - EXPORT AND IMPORT OPTIONS - 1

4.14.1 EXPORT OPTIONS

Configuration lists are exported in this menu. In order to export, proceed as follows:

  1. Select File > Export in the menu bar.
  2. After opening the menu, select the list to export (Extender, CPU, Console or User).
  3. Select the storage location for the export file.
  4. Confirm the export with the Finish button.

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

NEED HELP? LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7 TECHNICAL SUPPORT

1.8 77.8 77.2 26 9

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION - 1

text_image System - System Data General Automatic ID Show Help Device Name Export... Stop Select Type 1. Select Type 2. Export Configuration to Citi File Enterator CPU Console Other Info Sub Matrix Load Default Auto Save Enable COM Echo Enable LAK Echo Enable Redundate Synchronizer Syncrimerize users with user rights Icon Only Syncrimerize users with active rights Monitor IP Address Do the network address of the user rights Install IO Bouts SnailUse by OPV using printer, install during matrix updates via Start Cancel Config installed

FIGURE 4-61. FILE-EXPORT

4.14.2 IMPORT OPTIONS

Configuration lists are imported in this menu. To import, proceed as follows:

  1. Select File > Import in the menu bar of an offline configuration.
  2. After opening the menu, select the list to import (Extender, CPU, Console or User).
  3. Select the directory of the list to import.
  4. Confirm the import with the Finish button.

NOTE: Importing configuration lists is only possible in offline configurations.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - IMPORT OPTIONS - 1

text_image System - System Data Command: Automatic ID Device Name Sub Sub Matrix Load Default Auto Save Enable COM Echo Enable LAN Echo Enable Redundancy Syncorization Echo Only Master IP Address Immit UO Records Select Type Select Comfy-400-200 File Calculator CPU Compute User OK Cancel Cancel Reloaded

FIGURE 4-62. FILE-IMPORT

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

4.15 MATRIX CASCADING

This simple method of cascading allows a switchable connection between two matrices via Tie Lines.

The Matrix Cascading does not require Bundle 4.

This kind of configuration may become necessary if the number of ports in the entire system has to be increased or if certain important connections should be distributed to several matrices because of redundancy.

The Tie Lines are unidirectional and can only be used in one direction according to their configuration. For bidirectional use of cascading, you have to configure opposite Tie Lines.

To connect Tie Lines to the matrices, you have to create intended Master/Slave CON and Master/Slave CPU Devices that have to be switched within the cascaded environment.

You have the following options to configure Matrix Cascading:

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - MATRIX CASCADING - 1

text_image OSD JAVA

GENERAL PREPARATION

  1. Define a Master Matrix. All further matrices will be configured as Sub Matrices in the configuration process.
  2. Ensure that the Tie Lines will only be connected after finishing the configuration.

OSD

- Select Configuration >EXT Units in the main menu of the master matrix.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - OSD - 1

text_image Admin:PCON_010167832 Configuration F1:ID F2:Name F3:Next F4:Previous F5:Refresh F6:Find ESC EXT Units 010195668 EXT 010135668 010167832 EXT_010167832 010203247 EXT_010203247 010207794 EXT_010207794 016090105 EXT_016090105 040011492 EXT_040011492 EXT Data ID : 10135668 CPU/CON assigned Name : EXT_010135668 01003 CPU_010207794 Fixed : N Port 1/2 : 11 A Universal : N General OSD Data Horizontal mouse speed [1/x]: 4 Vertical mouse speed [1/x]: 5 Double click time [ms]: 700 Keyboard layout German DE.129 Video mode variable Extender OSD Data Enable CPU selection : N Enable connection info : N Update connection info : N Display time [sec]: N Horizontal position : N Vertical position : N EXT Type Input Signals CW1 CW2 Output Signals CW1 CW2 DVI/VGA-CPU [video ..] V N DVI/VGA-CON [video ..] H H HID-CON [keyb..wourse..] H H IHD-CPU [keyb..mouse..] H H Audio (analog, digital) H H Audio (analog, digital) H H RS232 (serial ..) H H RS232 (serial ..) H H USB-CON (embedded) H H USB-CPU (embedded) H H USB-CON (standalone) H H USB-CPU (standalone) H H Universal-CON H H Universal-CPU H H Cascade-CON H H Cascade-CPU H H New Edit COMPUTS Edit Switch 01

FIGURE 4-63. CONFIGURATION—EXT UNITS

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

  1. Press the New button. A new Extender Unit will be created that is needed for the connection of Tie Lines.
  2. Enter an appropriate extender name into the Name field.
  3. Enter a port number into the Port field according to the required connection of the Tie Line.
  4. If the Tie Line should be directed from the Sub to the Master, set the Cascade-CON option to Y (C#1) in the Input Signals column. If the Tie Line should be directed from the Master to the Sub, set the Cascade-CPU option to Y (C#1) in the Output Signals column.
  5. Save your settings by pressing the Okay button.
  6. If you have created a Master/Slave CON Unit, select Configuration > CON Devices in the main menu of the master matrix and press the New R button. A switchable CON Device will be created.
  7. If you have created a Master/Slave CPU Unit, select Configuration > CPU Devices in the main menu of the master matrix and press the New R button. A switchable CPU Device will be created.
  8. Enter an appropriate Device name into the Name field.
  9. Assign the previously configured Extender Unit to the just created Device by moving the Extender Unit from the Ext available field into the Ext assigned field and save your settings.
  10. Repeat steps 1 to 9 for the Sub Matrix.
  11. Select Configuration > System in the main menu of the Sub Matrix and set the Sub Matrix option to Y.
    The OSD of the Sub Matrix will immediately freeze and will be only accessible by using the keyboard command , , .
  12. Restart all I/O boards on which any Master/Slave CON or CPU Units have been configured or alternatively restart the matrix.
  13. Connect the Tie Lines to the matrices. Ensure that each Master/Slave CON on one matrix is connected to Master/Slave CPU on the other matrix to achieve switchability between two matrices.

The Matrix Casacading is now configured and can be used. Additional Tie Lines are configured accordingly. The use of cascading is described in Section 5.1.4.

JAVA TOOL

  1. Connect to the Master Matrix and activate the Online Configuration Mode.
  2. Select the menu Definition >EXT Units in the task area and press the New button. A popup window opens.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - JAVA TOOL - 1

text_image EXT Device Options 7 Open Save Reload Control Document Activate Online Configuration Save Online Changes Download Upload Monitoring Report Direct Find System Check Save Status GO PRESENTATION REPORTS Status Control Administration Assignment System Definition EXT Units CPU Devices COM Devices User Definition - EXT Units ID Name CPU Assigned Type CPS Standard View Export View F1 F10223962 T5-101 (14, 20) 1 CPU F2 F10223965 T5-101 (14, 20) 8 CPU F3 F10223966 T5-101 (14, 20) 3 CPU F4 F10223967 T5-104 (14, 20) 8 CPU F5 F10223968 T5-104 (14, 20) 4 CPU F6 F10223970 T5-104 (14, 20) 7 CPU F7 F10223971 T5-104 (14, 20) 9 CPU F8 F10223972 T5-104 (14, 20) 4 CPU F9 F10223973 T5-104 (14, 20) 16 CPU F10 F10223974 T5-104 (14, 20) 14 CPU F11 F10223975 T5-104 (14, 20) 42 CPU F12 F10223976 T5-104 (14, 20) 34 CPU F13 F10223977 T5-104 (14, 20) 60 CPU F14 F10223978 T5-104 (14, 20) 41 CPU F15 F10223979 T5-104 (14, 20) 97 CPU F16 F10223980 T5-104 (14, 20) 38 CPU F17 F10223981 T5-104 (14, 20) 80 CPU F18 F10223982 T5-104 (14, 20) 48 CPU F19 F10223983 T5-104 (14, 20) 35 CPU F20 F10223984 T5-104 (14, 20) 27 CPU F21 F10223985 T5-104 (14, 20) 23 CPU F22 F10223986 T5-104 (14, 20) 34 CPU F23 F10223987 T5-104 (14, 20) 34 CPU F24 F10223988 T5-104 (14, 20) 32 CPU F25 F10223989 T5-104 (14, 20) 36 CPU Average settings: Custom settings: Name: Basic Model A MultiA D:\Program Files\Provision\... Ctrl+Shift+F...

FIGURE 4-64. DEFINITION—EXT UNITS

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

  1. If the Tie Line should be directed from the Sub to the Master, select Master/Slave CON Unit in the Choose Extender Type selection box. If the Tie Line should be directed from the Sub to the Master, select Master/Slave CPU Unit in the Choose Extender Type selection box.
  2. Enter an appropriate extender name into the Name field.
  3. Enter a port number into the Port field according to the required connection of the Tie Line.
  4. Confirm your settings by pressing the Apply button.
  5. If you have created a Master/Slave CON Unit, select Definition > CON Devices in the task area of the master matrix and press the New button. A switchable CON Device will be created.
  6. If you have created a Master/Slave CPU Unit, select Definition > CPU Devices in the task area of the Master Matrix and press the New button. A switchable CPU Device will be created.
  7. Enter an appropriate extender name into the Name field.
  8. Assign the previously configured Extender Unit to the just created Device by moving the Extender Unit from the Extender available field into the Extender assigned field and save your settings by pressing the Apply button.
  9. Connect to the Sub Matrix and repeat steps 1 to 10.
  10. Select System > System Data in the task area of the Sub Matrix and activate the Sub Matrix option.
    The OSD of the Sub Matrix will immediately freeze and will be only accessible by using the keyboard command , , .
  11. Restart all I/O boards on which any Master/Slave CON or CPU Units have been configured or alternatively restart the matrix.
  12. Connect the Tie Lines to the matrices. Ensure that each Master/Slave CON on one matrix is connected to Master/Slave CPU on the other matrix in order to achieve switchability between two matrices.
    The Matrix Cascading is now configured and can be used. Additional Tie Lines are configured accordingly. The use of cascading is described in Section 5.1.4.

4.16 MATRIX GRID

In this menu, you can configure a Matrix Grid to connect two or more matrices. This kind of configuration may be necessary if the number of ports in the entire system has to be increased or if certain important connections should be distributed to several matrices because of redundancy.

The connections between two matrices have to be established by Grid Lines that are connected between particular I/O ports as connecting links. The Grid Lines can be used bidirectionally and can respectively handle a full access connection of a CON Device to a CPU Device.

The number of Grid Lines in the system specifies if a CON Device can be switched to a CPU Device in Non-Blocking Access or in Blocking Access and has to be separately determined for each Grid environment.

In this case, Non-Blocking Access means that a Grid Line for a cross-matrix switching operation of a CON Device to a CPU Device is available at any time.

Blocking Access means that for a certain switching operation no Grid Line may be available according to the switching status within the Grid. As a result, no cross-matrix switching will be possible.

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

NEED HELP?

LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7

TECHNICAL

SUPPORT

1.877.8 77.2 26 9

You have the following options to configure Matrix Grid:

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION - 1

text_image OSD JAVA

ADMINISTRATION OF SETTINGS

Within a Matrix Grid, you have to differ between settings that have to be made locally for each matrix and settings that can be made globally so that they are valid for the whole Matrix Grid.

The settings in the following menus have to be made separately for each matrix or within the master matrix to affect all matrices in the Grid:

System, Access, Switch, Network, Date + Time, SNMP, Matrix Grid, Multi-Screen Control

The settings in the following menus have to be made globally and only once within the Matrix Grid:

EXT Units, CPU Devices, CON Devices, User, CON Macros, User Macros, CON Favorites, User Favorites, Virtual CPU Devices, Virtual CON Devices

NOTE: If global settings are made in the respective menus, they will be immediately available on each matrix within the Matrix Grid.

GENERAL PREPARATION

The following requirements have to be fulfilled before starting the Matrix Grid configuration:

  1. The Matrix Grid function (Bundle 4) must be activated on all matrices to be connected to the Grid by a license key.
  2. Firmware V03.10 must be installed on all matrices to be connected to the Grid.
  3. All matrices to be connected to the Grid must be within the same TCP/IP network (see Section 4.4.5).
  4. The port 5556 needed for network communication must not be blocked by a firewall.

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

NEED HELP? LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7 TECHNICAL SUPPORT

1.87 7.8 7 7.2 26 9

OSD

To configure a Matrix Grid, proceed as follows. The following configuration steps have to be repeated for each matrix separately:

- Select Configuration > System in the main menu.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - OSD - 1

text_image admiRCON 018195237 Configuration ESC System Device : Switch 01 Name : Test_Grid Info : Factory settings Sub Matrix : N Load Default : N Auto Save : N Enable CON Echo : N Enable LON Echo : N Synchronize : N Echo Only : N Master IP Address : 000 000 000 000 Enable Auto Config : V ID Real CPU Device : 1000 ID Virt. CPU Device : 2000 ID Real CON Device : 3000 ID Virt. CON Device : 4000 Invalid IO-Boards : N Enable old Echoes : N OSO Data CPU Horizontal mouse speed : 1/xl: 4 Vertical mouse speed : 1/xl: 5 Double click time : 1msl: 200 Keyboard layout : German DE,129 Real name for network environment Name of percent matrix configuration Allow battery control (as cascaded environment) Load always default configuration Save matrix status automaticity Echo off switch commands via CPU ports Echo all switch commands via LAN ports Synchronize matrix with master settype Synchronize matrix with outer mode Start port active movement of real CPU device Start port active movement of virtual CPU device Start port active movement of real CPU device End port active movement of virtual CPU device Knee ID-based with enabled firmware online for audio Echo internal switch commands with old format Cancel Okay

FIGURE 4-65. CONFIGURATION—SYSTEM

  1. Enter a unique name for each matrix into the Device field. Each name only may exist once within the Matrix Grid.
  2. Enter a unique Grid name into the Name field. The Grid name has to be same within all Grid matrices.
  3. Select Configuration > Matrix Grid in the main menu.

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

NEED HELP? LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7 TECHNICAL SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.8 77.2 26 9

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION - 1

text_image adminRCON 010195237 Configuration ESG Matrix Grid V Enable Matrix Grid Active Device Ports Active Device Ports V Switch01 48 N 0 V Switch02 48 N 0 N 0 N 0 N 0 N 0 N 0 N 0 N 0 N 0 N 0 N 0 - De first device in the grid to the Vector Matrix Cancel Okay

FIGURE 4-66. CONFIGURATION—MATRIX GRID

  1. Activate the Enable Matrix Grid function.
  2. Write all device names of the Grid matrices into the Matrix Grid list, starting in the left column. Based on the listings, a Grid master will be automatically determined for the Matrix-Grid. The more on the top a matrix is listed in the matrix Grid list, the more likely

the matrix is considered in the automatic master selection, provided that certain criteria like system availability are fulfilled.

  1. Activate the single matrices in the Matrix Grid list by enabling the Y (YES) function.
  2. Enter the number of chassis ports for each matrix (8, 16, 32, 48, 64, 80, 160 or 288).
  3. Restart all matrices, beginning with the master matrix.

The Matrix Grid can be used now and offers the possibility for a cross-matrix switching of CON Devices to CPU Devices.

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

JAVA TOOL

To use the Matrix Grid, execute the configuration wizard in the menu System >Matrix Grid. It guides you through the configuration of Matrix Grids.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - JAVA TOOL - 1

text_image Matrix Grid Matrix Grid Configuration Matrix Grid Enabled Matrix 01 Matrix 02 Matrix 03 Matrix 04 Matrix 05 Matrix 06 Matrix 07 Matrix 08 Matrix 09 Matrix 10 Matrix 11 Matrix 12 Matrix 13 Matrix 14 Matrix 15 Matrix 16 Active Device IP address/Hostphone Ports Master Connect to Matrix 0.0.0.0 A 0.0.0.0 B 0.0.0.0 C 0.0.0.0 D 0.0.0.0 E 0.0.0.0 F 0.0.0.0 G 0.0.0.0 H 0.0.0.0 I 0.0.0.0 J 0.0.0.0 K 0.0.0.0 L 0.0.0.0 M 0.0.0.0 N 0.0.0.0 O 0.0.0.0 P 0.0.0.0 Q 0.0.0.0 R 0.0.0.0 S 0.0.0.0 T 0.0.0.0 U 0.0.0.0 V 0.0.0.0 W 0.0.0.0 X 0.0.0.0 Y 0.0.0.0 Z 0.0.0.0 AA 0.0.0.0 AB 0.0.0.0 AC 0.0.0.0 AD 0.0.0.0 AE 0.0.0.0 AF 0.0.0.0 AG 0.0.0.0 AH 0.0.0.0 AI Software Command Object Object Setup: C: Matls Customs Administration Assignment Systema System Data Access Switch Networks Date and Time Matls Grid Definition Config Inloaded

By default, the KVM extenders transmit the factory preset DDC (EDID) to the sources (computer, CPU). This information is suitable in most cases.

For special requirements, DDC information can be retrieved and uploaded as a binary file to both the CPU Unit and the CON Unit.

Next to the use of Hotkeys commands, the activation and management of the DDC information can also be handled centrally via KVM matrix to reach all connected KVM extenders at the same time.

You have the following option to manage DDC Information:

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - JAVA TOOL - 2

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

General Preparation

To use the DDC information management via Tera tool, this requires that DDC information has been already transmitted at a CPU Unit via Hotkey command or the DDC information is already available as a file with the extension .bin.

Java Tool

Several general options are available. For these options select the Definition >EXT Units menu in the task area, select an EXT Unit (CPU) and open the EDID tab:

  • To read the DDC information of an EXT Unit (CPU), select it and press the Read button in the symbol bar of the tab.
  • To locally store existing DDC information of an EXT Unit (CPU), select it and press the Save As.... button.
  • To set existing DDC information of an EXT Unit (CPU) back to factory default, press the Reset button.

To copy any manually transmitted USB-HID Ghosting information of a single EXT Unit (CPU) to other extenders, proceed as follows:

  1. Connect to the KVM matrix via Java tool and activate the Online Configuration mode in the symbol bar.
  2. Select the Definition >EXT Units menu in the task area and select the EXT Unit (CPU) with already transmitted EDID information.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - Java Tool - 1

text_image File Edit Device Express 2 Open Save Next Load Document Active Online Configuration Save Online Change Download Option Monitoring Flash Updates Device Finder System Check Save Status admin@102.108.170.591 Master Status Control Administration Assignment System Definition EXT Units CPU Devices COM Devices User Groups Definition - EXT Units

ID Name Prof

01 01014030 CPU_80403 6 02 01014030 EXT_V1504030 6 03 01030250 CPU_Tekken2 9 04 01040250 EXT_V1504025 6 05 01050147 EXT_C70_Pattan_7 42 06 01234081 EXT_CPU_Christian 28 07 04030250 EXT_CPU_Christian 28 08 01024025 CPU_Main 25 09 01019430 CPU_Main_52 3 10 01019434 CPU_Main_51 4 11 01019445 CPU_Main_51 3 12 01019451 CPU_Main_52 1 13 01019469 EXT_CPU_Fattan_5 49 14 02030464 EXT_CPU_Fattan_5 33 15 02030464 EXT_CPU_Fattan_5 34 16 02030555 CPU_Main 27 17 02027499 EXT_V15027499 9 18 04031457 EXT_V49981459 9 19 04036537 EXT_V49981459 9 20 04036626 EXT_V4998226 9 ID CPU Assigned Player CPU_Dominant Name EXT_CPU_Christian Port Redundant Port Fixed Editor Type Firmware Version USB-AID Chircling EDDI EDD-2 Open Save As Read Transend Reset Assign. General Manufacturer Name: 1.88 Product Code: PLANTER Serial Number: 166666666 Manufacturer Work: 7 Manufacturer Year: 2011 END Version: 1.3 EDD Checkroom: 6666 Extension Pixel Clock [MHz] 143.94 R_Active Pixels: 5.627 V_Active Pixels: 5.627 Abscutant Reading and writing the END results in a short interrupt of the connection. Access Settings As Copy Security Active... Save Unit Clear Load Cancel

FIGURE 4-68. MENU DEFINITION — EXT UNITS

  1. Select the EDID tab.
  2. Press the Read button.

The current DDC information of the EXT Unit (CPU) is read out and shown.

  1. Press the Assign.... button.

A popup window will appear.

  1. Select those EXT Units (CPU) in the Available to assign settings to field that are intended to receive the USB-DDC information.
  2. Press the respective button to move the EXT Units (CPU) into the Assign settings to.... field.
  3. Press the Next > button, confirm the occurring notification and finally press Next > again.
  4. Press the Start button to activate the transmission and press the Finish button as soon as the transmission is completed.

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

To load a DDC information template (.bin file extension) for a further distribution proceed as follows:

  1. Press the Open button in the EDID tab.
  2. Select the respective template with the file extension .bin and press the Select button.
  3. Select the EXT Unit (CPU) the DDC template should be transmitted to and press the Transmit button.
  4. If required, the DDC Ghosting information can be transmitted to any connected extender by pressing the Assign.... button.

4.18 FIRMWARE UPDATE

4.18.1 MATRIX UPDATE

The firmware of the matrix can be updated in this menu.

You have the following option to access the menu:

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - MATRIX UPDATE - 1

JAVA TOOL

NOTE: To update the matrix, only use computers that are not integrated into the KVM extender / matrix setup.

Ensure that the computer used for the update is not set into standby mode or sleep mode during the update.

Ensure that your configuration has been saved externally before you start the update.

For network stability, we do NOT recommend updating via a WLAN.

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

PREPARATION

Take the following steps to prepare for the matrix update:

  1. Save the matrix configuration externally (see Section 4.12.4).
  2. Open Extras > Options in the menu bar and insert in the setting Firmware Directory the directory from which the update files should be standardly sourced.
  3. Put all hot spare boards into the matrix.
  4. Activate the Syslog function (see Section 4.12.4) for the monitoring of the update, if unlocked via license key.

NOTE: Ensure that all USB 2.0 extenders are only connected to the provided ports (fixed ports) before you start the matrix update. Non-compliance may affect the stability of the update.

PERFORMING THE UPDATE

Take the following steps in order to be prepared for the matrix update:

  1. Select Administration > Update Matrix Firmware in the task area.

All components of the matrix that can be updated will be automatically selected and highlighted in green.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - PERFORMING THE UPDATE - 1

text_image Edit Edit Devices Agree 2 Open Save Next Reset Contract Document Activate Online Configuration Save Online Changes Download Utilized Monitoring Request Device Finder System Check Save Status GO 20190000000, Properties & Status Control Administration - Update Matrix Software Parameters System Definitions Name Type Car Version User Version Car Date User Date Status Update 80 AATC3A45 CPTA P12.06 150.01 2014-07-02 2015-01-28 Australia 81 AATC3A47 AAS P12.06 150.01 2014-07-02 2015-01-28 Australia 82 AATC3A48 UOSD P12.06 150.01 2014-07-02 2015-01-28 Australia 83 AATC3A49 AAS P12.06 150.01 2014-07-02 2015-01-28 Australia 84 AATC3A50 UOSD P12.06 150.01 2014-07-02 2015-01-28 Australia 85 AATC3A51 CIX P12.06 150.01 2014-07-02 2015-01-28 Australia 86 AATC3A52 UOSD P12.06 150.01 2014-07-02 2015-01-28 Australia 87 AATC3A53 CIX P12.06 150.01 2014-07-02 2015-01-28 Australia 88 AATC3A54 UOSD P12.06 150.01 2014-07-02 2015-01-28 Australia 89 AATC3A55 CIX P12.06 150.01 2014-07-02 2015-01-28 Australia 90 AATC3A56 UOSD P12.06 150.01 2014-07-02 2015-01-28 Australia 91 AATC3A57 CIX P12.06 150.01 2014-07-02 2015-01-28 Australia 92 AATC3A58 UOSD P12.06 150.01 2014-07-02 2015-01-28 Australia 93 AATC3A59 CIX P12.06 150.01 2014-07-02 2015-01-28 Australia 94 AATC3A60 UOSD P12.06 150.01 2014-07-02 2015-01-28 Australia 95 AATC3A61 CIX P12.06 150.01 2014-07-02 2015-01-28 Australia 96 AATC3A62 UOSD P12.06 150.01 2014-07-02 2015-01-28 Australia 97 AATC3A63 CIX P12.06 150.01 2014-07-02 2015-01-28 Australia 98 AATC3A64 UOSD P12.06 150.01 2014-07-02 2015-01-28 Australia 99 AATC3A65 CIX P12.06 150.01 2014-07-02 2015-01-28 Australia GO 3:4:4:4:4:4:4:4:4:4:4:4:4:4:4:4:4:4:4:4:4:4:4:4:4:4:4:4:4:4:4:4:4:4:4:4:4:4:4:4:4:4:4:4:4:4:4:4:4:4:4: Domestic active software

setto@admntecs.psdw#eapf########.com.cn Browse... Update Cancel

FIGURE 4-69. ADMINISTRATION—UPDATE MATRIX FIRMWARE

  1. Start the update by pressing the Update button in the appearing pop up window.
  2. Restart the Matrix after the update by pressing the Restart matrix button in the lower part of the working area.
    For a safe initialization of the matrix, we recommend a cold start (power cycle).

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

NEED HELP? LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7 TECHNICAL SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

4.18.2 EXTENDER UPDATE

The firmware of the extenders connected to the matrix can be updated in this menu.

You have the following option to access the menu:

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - EXTENDER UPDATE - 1

PREPARATION

Take the following steps in order to be prepared for the extender update:

  1. Save the matrix configuration externally (see Section 2.9). Open Extras > Options in the menu bar and insert the name of the directory from which the update files should be sourced in Firmware Directory.
  2. Connect all hot spare extenders to the matrix.

CAUTION: For network stability, an update via WLAN is not recommended.

PERFORMING THE UPDATE IN STANDARD MODE (PARALLEL UPDATE)

  1. Select Administration > Update EXT Firmware in the task area. The standard mode for the parallel update will be selected by default and the Upload Firmware tab will be opened.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - PERFORMING THE UPDATE IN STANDARD MODE (PARALLEL UPDATE) - 1

text_image File Edit Device Express 2 Open Save Filtered Connect Delay Online Configuration Save Online Changes Download Upload Monitoring Report Device Finder System Charge Save Status UF:20154300063209, Step 17.1p Status Control Administration Update Media Firmware Update EXIT Firmware Activate Configuration Reconciliation Assignment System Definition Administration - Update EXIT Firmware Parallel Mode (recommended) Parallel update of senders, executed separately on each I/O board Sequential Mode Sequential update mode in order to update specific senders Step Updated Firmware Step 2.1.Update Firmware Firmware File Available Firmware Files Name Type Version Code Selected 01 ECTC00P 0.01 FIOU 0.01 2016-10-24 02 ECTC00R 0.01 FIOU 0.01 2016-10-14 03 ECTC00P 0.04 FIOU 0.07 2016-12-32 04 ECTC00R 0.08 FIOU 0.09 2016-11-21 05 ECTC00P 0.09 FIOU 0.10 2016-12-14 06 ECTC00Q 0.10 FIOU 0.11 2016-12-23 07 ECTC00R 0.11 FIOU 0.12 2016-12-31 Option Progress: 5% Upgrade Option Messages: Save Protocol

FIGURE 4-70. ADMINISTRATION—UPDATE EXT FIRMWARE

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

  1. Before the actual update process, all firmware files have to be uploaded to the respective I/O boards on that extenders will have to be updated. If a newer firmware is available, appropriate I/O boards will be automatically selected for the upload in the Selected column and highlighted in green.
  2. Start the upload and distribution of the update files by pressing the Upload button.

NOTE: By performing the upload process, no update files will be installed. The update process can be performed at a later time.

If all I/O cards are not selected, the upload of the update files will be performed in sequence.

  1. After finishing the upload process, successful completion will be confirmed by a popup message. If you want to directly start the actual update process, you will have to confirm this by pressing the Yes button. You will be immediately forwarded to the Update Firmware tab.

NOTE: When updating an identical or an older firmware version than the version currently installed, the Force Update option in the lower part of the working area must be enabled.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION - 1

text_image File Edit Course Options General Name Printed Connect Download Activate Online Configuration Save Online Changes Download... Upload... Monitoring Report... Device Finder... System Check... Save Status All 2018E600311_Report Log Status Control Administration Update Note Firmware Update EXT Firmware Activate Configuration Miscellaneous Assignment System Definition Administration - Update EXT Firmware Parallel Mode (recommended) Parallel update of senders, executed separately on each I/O board Sequential Mode Sequential update mode in order to update specific senders Step 1: Upload Firmware Step 2: Update Firmware Enable Downgrade Enable the Direction when descending the following is updating the currently installed firmware type: Update Progress 0% Update Messages Save Protocol

FIGURE 4-71. ADMINISTRATION—UPDATE EXT FIRMWARE

  1. Start the actual update process by pressing the Update button.

NOTE: Just before the update process, all affected I/O boards will be set into Service Mode and retrieved gradually after finishing the respective updates.

PERFORMING THE UPDATE IN EXPERT MODE (SEQUENTIAL UPDATE)

Take the following steps in order to be prepared for the extender update:

  1. Select Administration > Update EXT Firmware and select Expert Mode in the upper part of the working area. All extenders that can be updated will be automatically selected and highlighted in green.

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

NEED HELP? LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7 TECHNICAL SUPPORT

1.8 77.8 77.2 26 9

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION - 1

text_image Update Exit Options Giant, Save, Print, Correct, Discount, Active Online Configuration, Save Online Changes, Download, Upload, Monitoring, Report, Device Finder, System Check, Save Status. Administration - Update EXIT Software Parallel Mode (recommended) Parallel update of component, executed as per date on each iOS board Sequential Mode Sequential update mode in order to update specific extensions Update Features Preferences ID Name Pref Type Car Version List Version Our Date Unit Date Update 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 Calendar Forward Version (conf) Manual update of EXITMODE - EXITMODE recommended Wrong module type (CPU/CON Interface) Undefinite Options based on default mode, default status change under the line. Choose... Update - Apply

FIGURE 4-72. ADMINISTRATION-UPDATE EXT FIRMWARE

  1. Set the matrix into Service Mode upon request in the popup window or via Matrix > Activate Service Mode in the menu bar. During activation, all matrix functions are disabled on the I/O boards on which an update is currently performed. An OSD picture indicates the activation of the Service Mode and is displayed on all monitors that are connected to the matrix via a CON device. In addition, the Service Mode is indicated by a red tool icon in the lower part of the working area.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION - 2

text_image 03081 CON 0101296%6 System Service Mode Service mode active. The system is not available. SWITCH 01

FIGURE 4-73. OSD VIEW-SERVICE MODE

CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION

  1. Start the update by pressing the Update button in the lower part of the working area.
  2. Quit Service Mode after updating after responding to the confirmation request in the popup window or via Matrix > Deactivate Service Mode in the task area.
  3. Verify after the update in the Java tool via Administration > Update EXT Firmware in the Protocol tab of the Expert Mode that the updates for all extenders have been installed correctly.

4.19 LICENSE MANAGEMENT

In this menu, the matrix can be upgraded with new function bundles by installation of license keys.

To obtain license keys to upgrade matrix functions, contact Black Box Technical Support at 877-877-2269 or info@blackbox.com.

You have the following option to access the menu.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - LICENSE MANAGEMENT - 1

JAVA TOOL

To activate a function bundle, proceed as follows:

  1. Select Administration > Miscellaneous > License Management in the task area.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - JAVA TOOL - 1

text_image File Edit Devices Options Drawn, Save, Retard, Connect, Disconnect, Active Online Configuration, Save Online Changes, Download, Cutout, Monitoring, Report, Device Finder, System Chart, Save Status All关联交易 Properties Notes Control Miscellaneous License Management: OISU System Show info System Number: SIF Background: VCCSP-50 Active Online Private (Tool only) Extended Switch (Tool only) API JASIP Spring Matrix Grid Multi-Screen Control Active License License Key:

FIGURE 4-74. ADMINISTRATION—MISCELLANEOUS—LICENSE MANAGEMENT

  1. Enter your license key in the working area under Activate Bundles in the License Key field.
  2. To activate the license key, press the Activate button. The new functions will be immediately enabled; a restart of the matrix will not be necessary.

The Modular KVM Matrix Switches can be operated in three different ways.

  1. Direct Switching

  2. via a keyboard connected to a CON port and the favorites

  3. by a macro keyboard connected to a console port

  4. OSD

  5. via keyboard/mouse directly connected to the CPU board of the matrix

  6. via keyboard/mouse connected to a CON Unit and the OSD

  7. External Switching Commands

  8. via an external computer via Java tool (network connection required)

  9. via a media control (network or serial connection required)

5.1 OPERATION VIA HOTKEYS

5.1.1 DIRECT SWITCHING

Direct switching by favorites on a keyboard is the fastest way for a user to switch at his console between different CPUs. This offers the option to switch video, keyboard and mouse or video only.

DIRECT SWITCHING OF VIDEO, KEYBOARD AND MOUSE

  1. Start Command Mode with the hotkey. Shift and Scroll LEDs on the keyboard will flash if Command Mode is activated.
  2. Enter the index number of the new CPU from the list of favorites and confirm with .
    At the same time, the Command Mode is closed and the console is connected to the new CPU, which takes over complete control.

Example: Switching to favorite CPU 7 with video, keyboard and mouse

, , <7>,

NOTE: Fastest switching time can be achieved by using identical mice, keyboards and monitors. This contributes to a smooth and seamless direct switching of the matrix.

SWITCHING IN PRIVATE MODE

  1. Start Command Mode with the hotkey. Shift and Scroll LEDs on the keyboard will flash if command mode is activated.
  2. Enter the index number of the new CPU from the list of favorites and confirm with , pressed at the same time.
    At the same time, the Command Mode is closed and the console is connected to the new CPU with complete control in Private Mode.

Example: Switching to favorite CPU 3 in Private Mode

, , <3>, ,

DIRECT SWITCHING OF VIDEO

  1. Start Command Mode with the hotkey.

Shift and Scroll LEDs on the keyboard will flash if command mode is activated.

  1. Enter the index number of the new CPU from the list of favorites and confirm with .

At the same time, Command Mode is closed and the console is connected to the new CPU with video only.

Example: Switching to favorite CPU 1 with video only

, , <1>,

SWITCH TO PREVIOUS CPU

  1. Start Command Mode with the hotkey. Shift and Scroll LEDs on the keyboard will flash if Command Mode is activated.

  2. Press the key

    of your keyboard.

At the same time, Command Mode is closed and the console is connected to the previous CPU with complete control.

NOTE: If you switch to a CPU that was previously connected with Video Access only, you will be connected to this CPU with full KVM access.

NOTE: You can only switch to valid, unused CPUs using hotkeys. The options Force Connect and Force Disconnect as well as the restrictions of the User ACL and CON ACL are taken into account.

Hotkeys are only supported if neither Enable User Login nor the Enable User ACL is selected and the user is logged in the OSD.

DISCONNECT CURRENT CONNECTION

  1. Start Command Mode with the hotkey. Shift and Scroll LEDs on the keyboard will flash if Command Mode is activated.

  2. Press the key on your keyboard.

The Command Mode is closed and the console is disconnected from the previous connected CPU.

5.1.2 SCAN MODE

Scan Mode enables fast switching between video signals from different CPUs registered as favorites without continuously using the hotkey.

Switching between two video signals can even take place within one frame.

  1. Start command mode with the hotkey. Shift and Scroll LEDs on the keyboard will flash if command mode is activated.

  2. Press the key and hold it down. You can now enter the index numbers of the various CPUs from the list of favorites with the keyboard and immediately switch to the video signal of the respective CPU after entering the index number.

  3. Leave Scan Mode by pressing + .

NOTE: Optimal results can be achieved by the use of as identical resolutions as possible. This contributes to a smooth and seamless function of the scan mode.

5.1.3 FUNCTION KEYS -

In Command Mode, you can retrieve the macros 1–16 with the function keys on the connected standard keyboard instead of the special macro keyboard.

The stored command sequence for the appropriate function key is executed and Command Mode is left immediately.

NOTE: It is not necessary to use to confirm selection of macros.

5.1.4 ADDRESSING OF MAIN AND SUB MATRICES

The Modular KVM Matrix Switch can be cascaded over two levels. You can send the commands (including opening the OSD) to either the main or the sub matrix.

When in command mode, you can select whether commands should be handled in the main or the sub matrix.

OSD Access

♦ OSD access to the main matrix: , , (optional),
♦ OSD access to the sub matrix: , , ,

To do a cross-matrix switching, proceed as follows:

  1. Open the OSD of the master matrix with the following keyboard sequence:
    ,
  2. Select the CPU device configured as Tie Line in the CPU selection list and press to switch.
  3. Open the OSD of the sub matrix with the following keyboard command:
    , ,
  4. Select your target CPU in the CPU selection list of the sub matrix.

NOTE: The selected master matrix / sub matrix mode is permanently activated until the other mode will be manually activated. This means that if you select , all prospective commands will be sent to the sub matrix, but not if the Command Mode is left in the meantime.

You have the following option to perform switching operations with the Modular KVM Matrix Switch.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - OSD Access - 1

OSD

- Select Switch in the main menu.

Press to show inactive CPU devices to expand the current view.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - OSD - 1

text_image CON/CPU Data CON device 03002 CON 010167832 CPU device 01004 CPU_010135668 01003 CPU_010207794 01001 CPU 016890105 01004 CPU_040011492 CON assigned CPU connected 01004 CPU_040011492 Status EXI list CPU assigned CON connected RMMO2 CON_010167832 Status EXI list COM scanner Start the CPU scanner in your user login Video with access with keyboard, file name displayed. Full access to standard mode with video sharing enabled. Full access to private mode with video sharing enabled. Remove your CPU device START the CPU scanner in your user login

FIGURE 5-1. SWITCH MENU

To switch the console to any available CPU, proceed as follows:

  1. Select in the CPU Devices list on the left hand side that one that should be connected to the CON Device.
  2. Confirm desired connection type with the appropriate keyboard command.

Switching operations from the own CON Device can only be performed on CPU Devices that are available in the CPU Devices list.

NOTE: Listed CPU Devices highlighted in red color are currently connected in Private Mode and are blocked by the connected CON Device.

The matrix offers the ability to execute KVM switching operations via a selection list for CPU Devices next to the OSD in full screen.

To use the selection list for CPU Devices, proceed as follows:

  1. Activate the Enable CPU Selection List option in the Configuration menu for those consoles where the selection list for CPU Devices should be available.
  2. Execute the key sequence for opening the OSD. The selection list immediately appears in the preset position of the extender OSD.

NOTE: Pressing hides inactive CPU Devices to provide a clearer overview.

  1. Execute the desired switching operation by pressing the respective key (see Section 5.3). To prevent a switching operation and access OSD, press . To close the selection list, press .

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - OSD - 2

text_image CON 010148867 Switch 01001 CPU_010135823 01000 CPU_010144317 01002 CPU_010148543 01004 CPU_010182323 01003 CPU_010182324 Full access + Disconnect F1: ID F2: Name F3: Next F4: Previous F5: Refresh F6: Find F7: Menu F10: Login SWITCH 01

FIGURE 5-2. SELECTION LIST CPU DEVICES

ACTIVATING THE AUTOMATIC SCAN MODE FOR CPU DEVICES

The matrix offers the ability to use a scan mode based on the favorite list of each console or user. Scan mode allows the matrix to switch in sequence between the CPU Devices in the favorite list within a predefined time. All scans are performed in video only mode.

To configure scan mode, refer to Section 4.11.1.

You have the following option to activate the scan mode:

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - ACTIVATING THE AUTOMATIC SCAN MODE FOR CPU DEVICES - 1

To activate scan mode, proceed as follows:

  1. Define a favorite list for the respective CON Device or user (see Section 4.11.4 for CON Devices or see Section 4.5.2 for users).
  2. Start Command Mode with the hotkey and press to open OSD.
  3. Select one of the CPU Devices in the CPU selection list that are defined in your favorite list.
  4. Confirm your selection by pressing the CPU Scanner button. The scan will automatically start.
  5. If you have enabled the Force CPU Scan option, the scan will automatically start after switching the respective CON Device to any CPU Device from the favorite list without the need to press the CPU Scanner button.

5.3 EXTENDED SWITCHING

You have the following option to perform switching operations with the Modular KVM Matrix Switch.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - EXTENDED SWITCHING - 1

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - EXTENDED SWITCHING - 2

OSD

To switch any console to any available CPU, proceed as follows:

- Select Extended Switch in the main menu.

NOTE: Pressing hides inactive CPU Devices to provide a clearer overview.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - OSD - 1

text_image 8001 CON 010125430 -- admin Extended Switch F1:10 F2:Name F3:Next F4:Previous F5:Refresh F6:Find ESC CON Devices 03007 CON_010123467 03005 CON_010123672 03004 CON_010124381 03002 CON_010125062 03000 CON_010125321 03001 CON_010125430 03003 CON_010129652 03006 CON_010129696 CON/CPU Data CON device CPU device 03007 CON_010123467 CON assigned CPU assigned CPU connected CON connected Status Status EXT list EXT list Select the CON device for extended switch(s) connect to: Disconnect the CON remote SWITCH 81

FIGURE 5-3. EXTENDED SWITCH MENU

  1. Select in the CON Devices list on the left hand side the one that should be switched to a CPU Device and open it by pressing .
  2. Select in the CPU Devices list on the left hand side that one that should be connected to the open CON Device.
  3. Confirm the desired connection type with the respective keyboard command.
    Switching operations from the user's CON Device can only be performed on CPU Devices that are available in the CPU Devices list. The following information is shown in this menu.

TABLE 5-1. EXTENDED SWITCH MENU OPTIONS

FIELD DESCRIPTION
CON device Assigned physical extender unit (CON Unit)
CON assigned Virtual CON Device that is assigned to the real CON Device
CPU connected Currently connected CPU Device
CON status Current connection status (CON Device)
EXT list List of all available physical extender units (CON Units)
CPU device Assigned physical extender unit (CPU Unit)
CPU assignedReal CPU Device that is assigned to a virtual CPU Device
CON connectedCurrently connected CON Device
CPU statusCurrent connection status (CPU Device)
EXT list List of all available physical extender units (CPU Units)

You can select the following switching functions.

TABLE 5-2. SWITCHING FUNCTIONS

FUNCTIONKEYBOARD COMMAND
Set a video only connection
Set a KVM connection
Set a KVM connection in private mode (video sharing disabled).+
Disconnect a CON Device from a CPU Device.

You have two options to perform switching operations for the Modular KVM Matrix Switch via Java tool.

Possibility 1:

- Select Control > Extended Switch in the task area.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - OSD - 2

text_image Control - Extended Switch Control External Switch Policies Administration Assignment Systems Definition Consute CPU ID Name Full access Video access Private access 01156 Catalyst 2 01157 Aircraft 3 01158 Catalyst 1 01159 Aircraft 2 01160 Aircraft 3 01161 Aircraft 4 01162 Aircraft 5 01163 Aircraft 6 01164 Aircraft 7 01165 Aircraft 8 01166 Aircraft 9 01167 Aircraft 10 01168 Aircraft 11 01169 Aircraft 12 01170 Aircraft 13 01171 Aircraft 14 01172 Aircraft 15 01173 Aircraft 16 01174 Aircraft 17 01175 Aircraft 18 01176 Aircraft 19 01177 Aircraft 20 01178 Aircraft 21 01179 Aircraft 22 01180 Aircraft 23 01181 Aircraft 24 01182 Aircraft 25 01183 Aircraft 26 01184 Aircraft 27 01185 Aircraft 28 01186 Aircraft 29 01187 Aircraft 30 01188 Aircraft 31 01189 Aircraft 32 01190 Aircraft 33 01191 Aircraft 34 01192 Aircraft 35 01193 Aircraft 36 01194 Aircraft 37 01195 Aircraft 38 01196 Aircraft 39 01197 Aircraft 40 01198 Aircraft 41 01199 Aircraft 42 01200

FIGURE 5-4. CONTROL—EXTENDED SWITCH

All connected consoles and the associated CPU connections are shown in columns in the working area in this menu.

NOTE: Switching operations can only be performed in online mode. That means an active network connection is required between the matrix and the Java Tool.

To set a KVM connection between a console and a CPU, double-click on the corresponding selection box within the Full Access column and select the requested CPU.
To set a video connection between a console and a CPU, double-click on the corresponding selection box within the Video Only column and select the requested CPU.
To set a Private Mode connection between a console and a CPU, double-click on the corresponding selection box within the Private Mode column and select the requested CPU.

NOTE: If a CPU console does not have access rights, it will not appear in the list.

The following symbols are shown in the connection overview.

TABLE 5-3. SYMBOLS

SYMBOL DESCRIPTION
Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - OSD - 3CON Device is connected via Shared Access with at least one further console to the same CPU. The CON Device has Full Access at the moment.
Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - OSD - 4CON Device is connected via Shared Access with at least one further console to the same CPU. The CON Device has a Video Access connection at the moment.

You can use the following buttons to perform a switching operation.

TABLE 5-4. SWITCHING BUTTONS

BUTTON FUNCTION
Send Send switching operations to the matrix
Reset Disconnect all existing connections within the matrix
Reload Reload switching status

NOTE: When the Auto Send function in the left lower corner of the work area is ticked, switching operations will be completed immediately without user confirmation via the Send button.

When the Hide Devices w/o Extender Assignment function in the left lower corner of the work area is ticked, only CON and CPU Devices that are assigned to extenders are shown.

- Select Status > Matrix View in the task area or select Status > Grid Port View when using a Matrix Grid.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - OSD - 5

text_image On: EMT Device Engine 1 Open Save Reload Connect Connected Activate Online Configuration Save Online Charges Download... Upload... Monitoring Report... Device Finder System Check Save Status all recommendation, Export Order Status Matrix View Grid Part Size Grid Features EMT Features Control Administration Assignment System Definition Status - Matrix View Device Name: Kinkgo PC 02 Volume Automatic Reset Drive Pin Network Displace Location Drive Wall Screen Control Drive Rebranded Lines (L) (L) (L) 90 Post Color Trading Full Accessible Video Accessible Grid Line Single Port No Accessible Pure Port All Post Systems Multi-Scale Functionals Accessibility Switch OFF Sprecher @ OFF Sprecher to Kinkgo PC 02

FIGURE 5-5. STATUS—MATRIX VIEW

To perform switching operations between CON and CPU Devices, proceed as follows:

  1. Move the mouse cursor to the port that has to be switched.
  2. Hold down the left mouse button and move the cursor to the port that has to be connected to the initial port. The current cursor movement will be displayed by a black auxiliary line.
  3. Release the left mouse button. A popup to select the available switching type (Full Access, Video Access or Private Mode) will be opened.
  4. Select the desired switching type. The switching operation will be immediately executed. At the same time all extender units that are assigned to the involved devices will be switched.

NOTE: If a port is shown with a red cross on Matrix View, the console does not have access rights to the CPU connected to that port.

To disconnect an existing connection between CON and CPU Devices, proceed as follows:

  1. Click on the port that is to be disconnected by using the right mouse button.
  2. Select the Disconnect function in the popup that appears. The connected ports will be immediately disconnected. At the same time, all further connections of the extenders assigned to the involved devices will be disconnected.

Next to executing macros via function keys -, they can also be executed via Macro List in the OSD. At the same time this specific list offers the possibility to see the content of the various macros including the single commands before executing them. There are 16 of the total 32 macros displayed per page.

You have the following option to to use the Macro List:

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - OSD - 6

OSD

Select Macro List in the main menu.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - OSD - 1

text_image CON_010263247 Macro List Key Macro - F01 CF(CON_010263247, CPU_010176892) CV(CON_010189131, CPU_040001301) - F02 - - F03 - - F04 - - F05 - - F06 - - F07 - - F08 - - F09 - - F10 - - F11 - - F12 - - F13 - - F14 - - F15 - - F16 - Technaport 848C

FIGURE 5-6. MENU - MACRO LIST

  1. Make sure that you have already configured CON or user macros.
  2. Select the respective macro in the list that you want to execute. If you want to execute a macro 17-32 (), press the key and select the macro afterwards.
  3. Execute the macro by pressing the key . The macro will be immediately executed.

NOTE: If the Macro List should be directly displayed upon opening OSD, activate the Show Macro List option in the Configuration > CON Devices menu for the respective CON Devices.

You can independently switch single extenders within configurations consisting of CON and CPU devices with multiple extenders.

You have the following option to switch single extenders.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - OSD - 2

OSD

To switch a single extender a device with multiple extender, proceed as follows:

- Select Switch in the main menu.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - OSD - 1

text_image CON 010167832 Switch E7/DEM ESC CPB Devices 01001 CPU 010207794 01001 CPU_016050105 01004 CPU_040011492 CON/CPU Data CON device 03002 CON_010167832 CON assigned CPU connected 01004 CPU_040011492 Status EXT List 010167832 033 EXT_010167832 010203247 034 EXT_010203247 CPU device 01003 CPU_010207794 CPU assigned CON connected Status EXT List 010135668 011 EXT_010135668 010207794 013 EXT_010207794 STOCK: Video write account with installed A server disabled EXTR: Full access to standard mode with video charging module DATA: 1.6x4x4x4x4x4x4x4x4x4x4x4x4x4x4x4x4x4x4x4x4x4x4x4x4x4x4x4x4x4x4x4x4x4x4x4x4x4x4x4x4x4x4x4x4x4x4x4x4x4x4x COM/PRICE: DISCONNECT YOUR CDN device ...... CPU Manager: Start the CPU server to your user favorites SMATCH 01

FIGURE 5-7. SWITCH MENU

  1. Select the respective CPU Device in the CPU selection list containing the extender you want to have access to.
  2. Press the function key on the keyboard. The standard will change into the switching mode for single extenders.
  3. Select the extender you want to switch within your CON Device.
  4. Access the extender list of the selected CPU Device by pressng the key .
  5. Select the CPU extender you want to switch to and press the key to execute the switching operation.

NOTE: Switching of single extenders from a Device is only possible in video only mode. Single exenders of a Device that are already switched will be highlighted with "!".

KVM extender CON Units connected to a local source (computer, CPU) can be locally switched via the matrix. Switching is performed between the local source and the KVM connection and can be executed via hotkeys or via OSD.

If you switch to the local source, the KVM connection will be automatically disconnected.

NOTE: When using CON Units with the possibility to connect a local source (computer, CPU) in a Multi-Screen Control environment, the local switching will be disabled.

You have the following option to switch to the local source.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - OSD - 2

OSD

- Select Switch in the main menu.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - OSD - 1

text_image CON 810182245 Switch F1:ID F2:Name F3:Next F4:Previous FS:Refresh F5:Find ESC CPU Devices Local CPU @1002 CPU_01 @1003 CPU_02 @1006 CPU_03 @1007 CPU_04 @1000 CPU_05 @1001 CPU_06 @1006 CPU_07 @1004 CPU_08 CON/CPU Data CON device @3004 CON_010182245 CPU device @1005 CPU_07 CON assigned CPU assigned CPU connected CON connected Status Status EXT list EXT list Video only account with Keyboard 3 mouse disabled Full access to standard mode with video watching module < Full access in private mode with update sharing disabled Disconnect your TSM device CPU Server Start the CPU server is run your favorite

FIGURE 5-8. CON SWITCH

To switch to a local source, proceed as follows:

  1. If you are not in the Switch menu of the OSD, start Command Mode with the hotkey (see Section 4.1).
  2. Press to open OSD. You will see a list of all available CPUs as a start menu.
  3. Switch to the CPU in the Local CPU list. The switching operation to the local source will be performed immediately.

NOTE: The local source (computer, CPU) will be only shown in the OSD if the connected CON Unit includes the option for a local connection.

As an alternative, the following keyboard commands are available to switch to the local source.

TABLE 5-5. KEYBOARD COMMANDS TO SWITCH TO A LOCAL SOURCE

FUNCTION KEYBOARD COMMAND
Switching to extender connection,,<1>,,
Switching to extender connection 2 (only with redundant CON Units),<2>,,
Switching to the local source (computer, CPU),<|>,,

5.7 MULTI-SCREEN CONTROL

The Multi-Screen function contains a switching of the USB-HID signal between different statically connected sources (computer, CPU) within a CON Device and can be performed in two different ways:

SWITCHING VIA MOUSE

The switching of the USB-HID signal can be made by a movement of the mouse pointer beyond the edge of the current display to a neighboring display (see Section 4.11.7).

To perform a switching operation by movement of the mouse pointer, proceed as follows:

  1. Move the mouse pointer to the edge of the display that borders the neighboring display vertically or horizontally.
  2. Move the mouse pointer beyond the edge of the display. The mouse pointer will appear on the adjacent display. The switching operation has been performed and the USB-HID signal will now be available at the target display.

SWITCHING VIA KEYBOARD

Switching of the USB-HID signal can also be achieved using the keyboard (for configuration, see Section 4.11.7).

To perform a switching operation via keyboard command, proceed as follows:

  1. Start Command Mode with the hotkey (see Section 4.1).
  2. Select the target display by pressing the respective key on the numeric pad of the keyboard. The switching operation will be performed and the USB-HID signal will be available at the target display.

You can select the following switching operations.

TABLE 5-6. SWITCHING OPERATIONS

KEYBOARD COMMAND FUNCTION
Switching of the USB-HID signal to the display (CON Unit with keyboard and mouse)
Switching of the USB-HID signals to display #1
Switching of the USB-HID signals to display #2
Switching of the USB-HID signals to display #3
Switching of the USB-HID signals to display #4

5.8 USB 2.0 SWITCHING

Switching USB 2.0 extenders basically works like switching KVM extenders. The following scenarios to switch USB 2.0 extenders are possible.

  1. An extender unit with USB 2.0 will be created and assigned to an already existing device with existing KVM extender units (see Section 4.10 or Section 4.11.1).
  2. A separate device for the extender unit with USB 2.0 will be created without assigning a KVM extender unit to that device. This possibility offers separate switching of the USB 2.0 signal (see Section 4.10 or Section 4.11.1).

NOTE: Switching USB 2.0 signals uses Extended Switching functionality (see Section 5.3).

When using parallel operation within the matrix, set the Release Time in the Configuration > Switch menu to 10 seconds or more (see Section 4.11.6). Otherwise, the connection of the USB 2.0 extender will not be established for security and stability reasons.

5.9 PRESETS

Predefined macros to switch the matrix without loading a new configuration can be created and activated in this menu.

You have the following option to access the menu.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - PRESETS - 1

- Select Control > Presets in the task area.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - PRESETS - 2

text_image File Edit Device Table 2 Open Save Record Command Document Active Online Configuration Save Online Changes Download Upload Monitoring Report Source Factor System Check Save Status #2010000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 Status Control Extended Switch Prests Administration Assignment System Definite Control - Presets Control Name Full Access CPU Main Access Private Access New Focus Control - Presets ID Name C:\Users\1 C:\Users\2 C:\Users\3 C:\Users\4 C:\Users\5 C:\Users\6 C:\Users\7 C:\Users\8 C:\Users\9 C:\Users\10 C:\Users\11 C:\Users\12 C:\Users\13 C:\Users\14 C:\Users\15 C:\Users\16 C:\Users\17 C:\Users\18 C:\Users\19 C:\Users\20 C:\Users\21 C:\Users\22 C:\Users\23 C:\Users\24 C:\Users\25 C:\Users\26 C:\Users\27 C:\Users\28 C:\Users\29 C:\Users\30 C:\Users\31 C:\Users\32 C:\Users\33 C:\Users\34 C:\Users\35 C:\Users\36 C:\Users\37 C:\Users\38 C:\Users\39 C:\Users\40 C:\Users\41 C:\Users\42 C:\Users\43 C:\Users\44 C:\Users\45 C:\Users\46 C:\Users\47 C:\Users\48 C:\Users\49 C:\Users\50 C:\Users\51 C:\Users\52 C:\Users\53 C:\Users\54 C:\Users\55 C:\Users\56 C:\Users\57 C:\Users\58 C:\Users\59 C:\Users\60 C:\Users\61 C:\Users\62 C:\Users\63 C:\Users\64 C:\Users\65 C:\Users\66 C:\Users\67 C:\Users\68 C:\Users\69 C:\Users\70 C:\Users\71 C:\Users\72 C:\Users\73 C:\Users\74 C:\Users\75 C:\Users\76 C:\Users\77 C:\Users\78 C:\Users\79 C:\Users\80 C:\Users\81 C:\Users\82 C:\Users\83 C:\Users\84 C:\Users\85 C:\Users\86 C:\Users\87 C:\Users\88 C:\Users\89 C:\Users\90 C:\Users\91 C:\Users\92 C:\Users\93 C:\Users\94 C:\Users\95 C:\Users\96 C:\Users\97 C:\Users\98 C:\Users\99 C:\Users\100 Hide Devices will Enter Insgesetment Hide Inactive Devices New Focus

FIGURE 5-9. CONTROL-PRESETS

To create a new switch macro, proceed as follows:

  1. Open a new switch macro by clicking the New symbol in the right column of the working area.
    You are asked if the existing connections should be taken over for the new switch macro.
  2. Set the desired switching operations in the corresponding columns (Full Access, Video Only or Private Mode) by using a double click on the appropriate selection box or use the function for a disconnect (Disconnect CPU).
  3. Save the created switch macro by clicking the Save symbol in the right column of the working area. A save dialog will be opened.
  4. Enter a name or the new switch macro and confirm by pressing the Ok button in the save dialog.
  5. By clicking on a selected switch macro with the right mouse button, you can create a copy of the current switch macro when using the Save as... option.
  6. Previously saved macros can be deleted by pressing the Delete symbol.

To load a predefined switching, proceed as follows:

  1. Select the switch macro in the right column of the working area that has to be loaded.
  2. Activate the selected switch macro by pressing the Send button on the bottom right of the working area.

NOTE: A predefined switch macro can only be activated in online mode. When loading presets, only those switching operations that are compliant with the hardware and the configuration of the currently used matrix are taken into account.

KVM extenders with redundant connectors for interconnect cables can be simultaneously operated with both connectors at a single Matrix or a Matrix Grid (from firmware version V04.00).

The connector labeled with Link 1 at the KVM extender is meant for the primary connection. If the connection on CON or CPU Unit side is interrupted due to any problem, the connection will be automatically re-established through the second connector labeled with Link 2.

For this kind of redundancy function, there is no need for any configuration of the KVM matrix or the KVM extenders.

If needed, you can manually switch between Link 1 and Link 2 at the CON Unit (see Section 5.5).

You have the following possibilities to check the status of redundancy.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - PRESETS - 3

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - PRESETS - 4

OSD

- Select Switch in the main menu.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - OSD - 1

text_image CON CPU Data CON device 03002 CON_010167832 CPU device 01004 CPU_040011492 CON assigned CPU connected 01004 CPU_040011492 Status CON connected 03002 CON_010167832 Status EXIT list EXIT list Video insert access with keyboard C empty (Enabled) Full access in peripheral mode with video driver modified Full access in private audio with video driver disabled Microsoft your CPU device Start the CPU scanner to save your Function

FIGURE 5-10. SWITCH

When using redundant KVM extenders, the respectively active connector is shown in this view under EXT list in the field CON/CPU Data. If the first connector (Link 1) is active, it will be highlighted with :1 behind the respective extender. If the second connector (Link 2) is active, this will be highlighted with :2.

JAVA TOOL

- Select Status > Matrix View in the task area.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - JAVA TOOL - 1

text_image File Edit Device Style 1 General Pass Refresh Control Commanded Activate Online Configuration Save Online Changes Download Upload Winshing Repeat Device Finder System Check Save Status all strings(No.101.02) Marker Status - Matrix Value Alpha View Grid Port User Matrix Formware EXT Formware Control Administration Assignment System Definition AutoCAD AutoCAD Display Show Port Assets Show Port Show Web Screen Status Show a Requested Line (A:1,2) All Port Elements Binding Full Access Video Access Single/One Multi-Port No Access Next Port All Port Symbols Multi-System Control SendToBench Line 1 Line 2 Audio Bars Save Options

FIGURE 5-11. MATRIX VIEW

To check the connection status of the redundant KVM extenders, proceed as follows:

  1. Activate the checkbox Show Redundant Links (L1/L2) under Options on the right side of the working area.
  2. Open the menu Redundancy on the right side of the working area, in order to receive the respective legend information. Redundant connectors are highlighted in the Matrix View with L1 and L2. The respectively active link is highlighted with a light green label.

5.11 LDAP INTEGRATION

This section outlines the steps taken to configure the DKM FX system with an Active Directory Server using LDAP. This section only applies to the new CPU board.

Step 1: Go to your Active Directory server and create a new LDAP User who will be used for the auto synchronization between the AD server and DKM. You can place this user anywhere, but they must be configured so that they are not removed and the password doesn't change (if password changes for this user, you need to update it accordingly in DKM). In our example, we created the user "adsync" and his password never expires.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - LDAP INTEGRATION - 1

text_image Server Manager File Action View Help Server Manager (WIN-GPF8GRFGEQM) Roles Active Directory Domain Services Active Directory Users and Compute bbsengineering.local Builtin Computers Domain Controllers Engineering ForeignSecurityPrincipals Managed Service Accounts People adsync Properties Name Type Descript Ashley Benard User Garrett Swindell User New Adoring User adsync User Recent User tim User User logon name: adysnc @bbsengineering.local User logon time (pre-Windows 2000): BBNSENGINEERING\adysnc Logon Hours... Log On To... Unlock account Account options: User must change password at next logon User cannot change password Password never expires Store password using reversible encryption Account expires Never End of: Thursday . May 09, 2019

FIGURE 5-12.

Step 2: Next, you need to create your KVM Groups within the AD Server. We recommend that you create a new Organization Unit (it can be named anything, but we chose the OU=KVM) as seen in the next image first. Once you create your new Organizational Unit, go to that OU group and right click and select "Group". Create as many groups as you like. In our example I have 3 groups, Pittsburgh, LA, and New York.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - LDAP INTEGRATION - 2

text_image Server Manager File Action View Help Server Manager (WIN-GPF8GRFGEQM) Roles Active Directory Domain Services Active Directory Users and Computer bbnsengineering.local Builtin Computers Domain Controllers Engineering ForeignSecurityPrincipals Managed Service Accounts People Test Users User Users DKM KVMUsers Unused NorthAmerica Pittsburgh LA NewYork KVM Active Directory Sites and Services Sites DHCP Server DNS Server Features Diagnostics Configuration Storage KVM 3 objects [Filter Activated] Name Type Description Pittsburgh Security Group - Global LA Security Group - Global NewYork Security Group - Global Delegate Control... Move... Find... New Computer All Tasks Contact Refresh Group Export List... View InetOrgPerson MSMQ Queue Alias Organizational Unit Printer User Shared Folder Help

FIGURE 5-13.

Step 3: Now that you have created several groups to organize your KVM Users, you can now begin adding users to these groups. The users can be located anywhere in the Active Directory server, but when you create the group, you can quickly add those other users in other Organizational Units into this group. As seen below, we have the Group Pittsburgh with 2 users. These users are located under bbnsengineering.local/NorthAmerica/Pittsburgh. These are the only two users that need KVM access.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - LDAP INTEGRATION - 3

text_image Server Manager File Action View Help Server Manager (WIN-GPF8GRFGEQM) Roles Active Directory Domain Services Active Directory Users and Comput bbnsengineering.local Builtin Computers Domain Controllers Engineering ForeignSecurityPrincipals Managed Service Accounts People Test Users User Users DKM KVMUsers Unused NorthAmerica Pittsburgh LA NewYork KVM Active Directory Sites and Services Sites DHCP Server DNS Server Features Diagnostics Configuration Storage KVH 3 objects [Filter Activated] Name Type Description Pittsburgh Security Group - Global LA Security Group - Global NewYork Security Group - Global Pittsburgh Properties General Members Member Of Managed By Members: Name Active Directory Domain Services Folder User1 bbnsengineering local/NorthAmerica/Pittsburgh User2 bbnsengineering local/NorthAmerica/Pittsburgh Add... Remove OK Cancel Apply Actions KVH More Actions Pittsburgh More Actions

FIGURE 5-14.

Step 4: Now, go to your DKM Java Tool and be sure you enable Remote Configuration (at the top of the toolbar). First go to Network>>SNMP and enable the SNMP agent. This feature is required to be turned on if using LDAP.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - LDAP INTEGRATION - 4

text_image OKM Tool 16.1.1 File Edit Device Options 2 Open Save Reset Connect Discount Remote Configuration OFF Remote Save Download Update Monitoring Flash Update Device Finder System Click Save Status © morning@10.1.19 X View Matrix Port Grid Control Control Extended Switch Prays Status & Updates Status - Matrix Firmware Status - Extender Firmware Update - Matrix Firmware Update - Extender Firmware Activate Configuration Miscellaneous System Settings System Access Switch Network Date and Time Matrix Grid Extender & Devices Exit Units CPU Devices COM Devices User Settings Users & Groups Assignment Virtual CPU Devices Virtual COM Devices Multi-Screen Control System Settings - Networks Remote Configuration Mode activated Show Help SHMP Agent (Online charges requires a matrix restart) SHMP Agent ✓ Enable SHMP Agent for GET requests and hope Port 143 Configured SHMP2 User Host configured SHMP2 User on to config a Definition - User SHMP Trap (Online charges requires a matrix restart) Trap Receiver 1 Trap Receiver 2 Enable Traps SHMP Server 8 5 9 8 Port 102 Status ✓ Switch Command ✓ Temperature ✓ Fan Tray 1 ✓ Insert IO Board ✓ Fan Tray 2 ✓ Remove IO Board ✓ Power Supply 1 ✓ Invalid IO Board ✓ Power Supply 2 ✓ Insert Extender ✓ Power Supply 3 ✓ Remove Extender ✓ Power Supply 4 ✓ Setup Cancel Config reloaded

FIGURE 5-15.

Step 5: Next, click on the LDAP tab (located in System Settings>>Network>>LDAP) and enable LDAP. If your AD server uses TLS/SSL, you need to enable this (if you select wrong, you will not be able to sync with server). You may use LDP.EXE, which is a Microsoft tool that can help you determine if you are using TLS/SSL.

Enter the LDAP Server IP address (on my server I went to Start and typed CMD, then did IPCONFIG and confirmed my NIC was configured for 10.8.1.100). Now enter the Port number (default 389). You can now type in your Base DN which should be similar to ours of "dc=bbnsengineering,dc=local". Your domain name can be found in your AD server.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - LDAP INTEGRATION - 5

text_image DBM Text 16.1.1 File Edit Device Extras 2 Black Box Send to: 10.6.1.09 X View Matrix Port Grid Control Control Extended Switch Products Status & Updates Status - Matrix Firmware Status - Extender Firmware Update - Matrix Firmware Update - Extender Firmware Activate Configuration Miscellaneous System Settings System Assists Switch Networks Date and Time Matrix Grid Extender & Devices EXIT Units CPU Devices CON Devices User Settings Users & Groups Assignment Virtual CPU Devices Virtual CON Devices Multi-Servers Control System Settings - Network Remote Configuration Mode activated Show Help LDAP (Current changes require a model restart) LDAP Use TLS/SSL Disable authentication with Active Directory Server LDAP Server 10 8 1 100 Port 388 Configured LDAP User addams LDAP User can be configured a Definition - User Base DN do-temengineering.do-local Example server development.dwt-net

FIGURE 5-16.

Step 6: Now create your Active Directory / LDAP Sync User by going to User Settings>>Users & Groups, and click on New User and make them an LDAP USER. This user should be a special user that is only used for synchronization. In our configuration, we made sure this adsync user's password doesn't expire. The Name can be any name you choose, the Login Name MUST match the AD Login name, and for this ADSYNC user you MUST enter the password so that it can synchronize all other users. Once you add this user, they should automatically be added to the LDAP configuration as seen in step 5.

YOU MUST NOW PERFORM A RESTART ON THE SWITCH SO IT CAN ENABLE THE LDAP SERVICE. BE SURE TO APPLY YOUR CHANGES AND ACTIVATE THE CONFIGURATION, THEN RESTART.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - LDAP INTEGRATION - 6

text_image DXM Tool 18.1.1 File Edit Device Options 2 Open... Save Refresh Correct Decomment Remote Configuration QTF: Newer Save Download... Upload... Rendering Flash Updates... Device Finder... System Check... Save Status... admin@10.9.1.05 - X View User Settings - Users & Groups Users Groups ID Name T

ID

Name 01 00001 admin Control 02 00002 system Extended Switch 03 00004 self PreEdit 04 00006 user Status & Updates 05 00008 userf Status - Matrix Firmware Status - Extender Firmware Update - Matrix Firmware Update - Extender Firmware Activate Configuration Miscellaneous System Settings System Address Switch Networks Date and Time Matrix Grid Extender & Devices EXIT Units CPU Device CON Devices User Settings Users & Groups Assignment Virtual CPU Devices Virtual CON Devices Multi-Screen Control Assign Settings to... Copy Settings from... Add User Delete User ADD BOX ADD BOX Administrator AD Speceniseased Name adync Super User AD Group Locked Logic Name adync Power User Password **** SNMP User Priority 888 LDAP Login ✓ Auto Connect CPU Access Control Favorites Machine Full Access Video Access No Access ID Name ID Name ID Name CPU_010258271 1000 CPU_010258271 CPU_010258271

FIGURE 5-17.

Step 7: Go to Users & Groups, then click on the Groups tab at the top of the page. Now click on "New Group" in bottom right, and when prompted, configure it is an LDAP group. Give this group any Name, but in the LDAP OU=, be sure to enter your OU properly in the format of "OU=KVM" as seen below.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - ID - 1

text_image DCM Tool 5.4.1 File Edit Device Options Current Save Reset Comment Remote Configuration OFF Remote Save Download Spread Monitoring Flash Update Device Finder System Check Save Status admng(10.0.1.9) X User Settings - Users & Groups Users Groups F ID Name 01 ###002 ###000000 ID Name KVMGroup LDAP Logis AD Specenized LDAP Off-00HKOM User Assignment CPU Access Control UserGroup available ID Name 000862 admin 000864 M# UserGroup assigned

ID Name

44 User Group Devite Group OK Cancel Config reloaded VCS133

FIGURE 5-18.

Step 8: Within a 5 minute window (the DKM syncs every 5 minutes), users/groups will begin populating with the Java Tool. You can press the F5 to refresh the page, or use the manual Reload button at the top to check for updates. These groups/users will automatically be imported. Once imported, you may configure the access rights of the group or individual. If you do not see any updates, you will want to enable SYSLOG, as it will show you if there are any LDAP communication errors.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - ID Name - 1

text_image User Settings - Users & Groups Users Groups

ID Name

01 00003 KVMGroup 02 00005 LA 03 00006 user4 04 00007 NewYork 05 00008 user6 06 00009 user5 07 00010 Pittsburgh 08 00011 user2 09 00012 user1 ID 3 LDAP Login ✓ Name KVMGroup AD Synchronized LDAP OU= OU=KVM User Assignment CPU Access Control User/Group available ID Name 00002 adasync 00004 Jeff

FIGURE 5-19.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - ID Name - 1

text_image User Settings - Users & Groups Users Groups

ID Name

01 00001 admin 02 00002 adsync 03 00004 Jeff 04 00006 user4 05 00008 user5 06 00009 user5 07 00011 user2 08 00012 user1 ID 6 Name User4 AD CN= User4 Password Priority 0 Administrator AD Synchronized Super User AD Group Locked Power User SNMP User LDAP Login Auto Connect CPU Access Control Favorites Macros Full Access Video Access ID Name ID Name

FIGURE 5-20.

NOTE: You may also create an LDAP user manually by going to the Users page and select New User>>LDAP User. Once here, enter the Name for the user, and for the Login Name, enter the user in the following format (user@domain.local). Save this user and when you login, it will store the user password in case the AD Server cannot be accessed.

NOTE: The DKM will store the last used LDAP password in the event the AD server cannot be accessed.

NOTE: You must create a Group for your users so they are properly imported/synchronized. If you use an Organizational Unit (like People below), you will import, but the users will show up as groups and not users. You must go to your AD server and right-click to create a group, then add users to that group for synchronization.

Video Setup: https://youtu.be/JLsbJQTZdyU

Our Active Directory structure used for this setup is as follows:

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - ID Name - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["bbnsengineering.local (Domain)"] --> B["NorthAmerica (OU)"]
    A --> C["People (OU)"]
    B --> D["Pittsburgh (OU)"]
    B --> E["LA (OU)"]
    B --> F["NewYork (OU)"]
    B --> G["KVM (OU)"]
    D --> H["User1 (User)"]
    D --> I["User2 (User)"]
    E --> J["User4 (User)"]
    E --> K["User5 (User)"]
    E --> L["User6 (User)"]
    F --> M["Pittsburgh (Group)"]
    F --> N["LA (Group)"]
    F --> O["New York (Group)"]
    C --> P["This is the user that is assigned for DKM synchronization"]
    P --> Q["ADSYNC (User)"]
    P --> R["Garrett (User)"]
    P --> S["Merle (User)"]
    P --> T["Tim (User)"]
    P --> U["Jeff (User)"]

FIGURE 5-21.

5.12 SERIAL INTERFACE

Predefined macros to switch the matrix without loading a new configuration can be created and activated in this menu. You have the following option to access the menu.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - SERIAL INTERFACE - 1

The Modular KVM Matrix Switch offers the option to switch via a serial interface (RS-232).

Detailed information for the serial interface and the corresponding switching commands are available in form of an API (application programming interface) at blackbox.com or ftp://ftp.blackbox.com/manuals/A/ACX048-R2_API_rev2.pdf.

5.13 POWER ON AND POWER DOWN FUNCTIONS

5.13.1 RESTART

You have the following options to perform a restart.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - RESTART - 1

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - RESTART - 2

OSD

  1. Select Configuration > Restart Matrix or Restart IO Board in the main menu to restart either the matrix or the I/O boards.
  2. Confirm the selection with Okay button.

The matrix and the I/O boards will be restarted with the current settings.

JAVA TOOL

- Select Matrix > Restart Matrix in the menu bar.

The matrix will be restarted with the current settings.

NOTE: The boot process of the matrix might take longer if there is no physical network connection available.

5.13.2 FACTORY RESET

You have the following option to perform a restart.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - FACTORY RESET - 1

CAUTION: If you perform a (factory) reset, all current settings and all configurations stored in the matrix will be lost. This also applies to the network parameters (reset to DHCP) and the admin password.

NOTE: If a firmware update has been installed since the delivery, the matrix will be set to the state defined there.

  1. Select Configuration > Factory Reset in the main menu.
  2. Confirm the selection with the Okay button.
    The matrix will be reset to factory settings.

5.13.3 POWER DOWN

You have the following option to shut down the system or single components.

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - POWER DOWN - 1

OSD

To shut down the system, proceed as follows:

  1. Select Configuration > Shut down Matrix in the main menu.
  2. Confirm the selection with the Okay button.
    The matrix will be shut down.

To shut down an I/O board, proceed as follows:

  1. Select Configuration > Shut Down IO Board in the main menu.
  2. Confirm the selection with the Okay button.
    The I/O board will be shut down.

5.14 SUMMARY OF KEYBOARD COMMANDS

The following table contains a summary of keyboard commands that can activate extender and matrix functions after executing the hotkey.

TABLE 5-7. EXTENDER KEYBOARD COMMANDS

KEYBOARD COMMAND DESCRIPTION
Download of DDC information for the monitor connected to the CON Unit into the CPU Unit
Switch to the KVM connection 1 (only with HDMI CON Units with available connection for a local source)
Switch to the KVM connection 2 (only with HDMI CON Units with available connection for a local source and a redundant interconnection)
Switch to local source (computer, CPU) (only with HDMI CON Units with available connection for a local source)
USB-HID Ghosting: Write device descriptions of the input devices connected to the CON Unit into the CPU Unit. Activate the emulation in the CPU Unit.
Activate the emulation of already stored device descriptions in the CPU Unit
Deactivate the emulation of active device descriptions in the CPU Unit. The input devices connected to the CON Unit will be passed transparently to the source (computer, CPU)
Deactivate the emulation of active device descriptions in the CPU Unit. Delete the descriptions out of the CPU Unit. The input devices connected to the CON Unit will be passed transparently to the source (computer, CPU)
Switch to video channel 1 of the Dual-Head CPU Unit (dual-head series only)
Switch to video channel 2 of the Dual-Head CPU Unit (dual-head series only)

TABLE 5-8. MATRIX KEYBOARD COMMANDS

KEYBOARD COMMAND DESCRIPTION
Open OSD
Open OSD of the master matrix in a cascaded environment
Open OSD of the sub matrix in a cascaded environment
Set a KVM connection (keyboard, mouse and video) to the selected source (computer, CPU)
Set a video only connection to the selected source (computer, CPU)
Set a Private Mode connection to the selected source (computer, CPU)
Close the current connection of the console
Switch back to the previous connected source (computer, CPU) with a KVM connection
Switch to a source (computer, CPU) stored in the Favorite List with a KVM connection (video only or Private-Mode connection)
Execute a predefined macro
Change the hotkey according to the predefined hotkey table
Define freely selectable hotkey
Change the hotkey for direct OSD access according to the predefined hotkey table
Define freely selectable hotkey for direct OSD access
Switch the USB-HID signal to the user's display (CON Unit with keyboard and mouse)
Switching of the USB-HID signals to display #1
Switching of the USB-HID signals to display #2
KEYBOARD COMMAND DESCRIPTION
Switching of the USB-HID signals to display #3
Switching of the USB-HID signals to display #4

CHAPTER 6: MAINTENANCE

The Modular KVM Matrix Switch contains various components and assemblies that can be maintained. All relevant components and assemblies are hot swappable and can be removed and exchanged during operation.

The following exchangeable components can be found within the Modular KVM Matrix Switch.

6.1 POWER SUPPLY UNITS

To exchange the power supply units, proceed as follows:

  1. Make sure that the power cord cable is removed from the power supply that has to be exchanged.
  2. Unlock the locking screw(s).
  3. With the power supply units of ACX288-R2 and ACX160-R2, turn the unlocked bracket down.
  4. Pull the power supply unit out of the corresponding slot.
  5. Push a new or maintained power supply unit into the slot and lock it accordingly.
  6. Connect the power cord cable to the power supply unit. It will be recognized by the system and can be used afterwards.

6.2 FAN TRAYS

To exchange the fan trays, proceed as follows:

  1. Unlock the locking screw(s).
  2. Pull the fan tray out of the corresponding slot by using the provided mount.
  3. Push a new or maintained fan tray into the slot.
  4. Lock the fan tray accordingly. It will be recognized by the system and can be used afterwards.

6.3 CPU BOARD

To exchange the CPU board, proceed as follows:

  1. Pull the locking pin slowly out of the CPU board up to the stop. Wait until the CPU board is deregistered from the matrix. The deregistration will be confirmed by a permanent green light of the status LED #1 on the CPU board (see Section 2.7.1).
  2. Remove all cables from the CPU board.
  3. Pull the CPU board out of the corresponding slot by using the locking pin.
  4. Push a new or maintained CPU board into the slot and lock it accordingly.
    A successful registration of the CPU board will be shown by a permanent green flashing of status LED #1.
  5. Connect all cables to the CPU board according to the exchanged board.

NOTE: When exchanging a CPU board the new one will automatically receive the current matrix configuration. During CPU board exchange the Modular KVM Matrix Switch should not be switched off.

6.4 I/O BOARD

To exchange a I/O board, proceed as follows:

  1. Pull the locking pin slowly out of the I/O board up to the stop. Wait until the I/O board is deregistered from the matrix. The deregistration will be confirmed by a permanent green light of the status LED #1 on the CPU board (see Section 2.7.1).
  2. Remove all cables from the I/O board.
  3. Pull the I/O board out of the corresponding slot by using the locking pin.
  4. Push a new or maintained CPU board into the slot and lock it accordingly.
    A successful registration of the CPU board will be shown by a permanent green flashing of status LED #1.
  5. Connect all cables to the I/O board according to the exchanged board.

NOTE: For a 24/7 operation, we recommend that you maintain a stock of critical spare parts, including a chassis.

6.5 FILTER PADS

Filter pads should be checked regularly for accumulated dust and cleaned with low pressure compressed air or suction.

The inspection cycle depends on the ambient air and cannot be determined generally, but a period of 6 months should not be exceeded.

Filter pads or filter trays should be replaced at regular intervals not exceeding one year.

To replace a filter pad, proceed as follows:

  1. Pull the filter pad together with the mounting frame out of the proper slot by using the handle.
  2. Press the used filter pad out of the proper mounting frame. In Chapters 7 and 8, support for problems with the Modular KVM Matrix Switch is provided. It is assumed that fully operational CPU and CON Devices are available, which can be tested over a peer-to-peer connection using CATx or fiber cables. Refer to the relevant manuals for assistance with this if necessary.
  3. Insert a new filter pad into the mounting frame.
  4. Replace the mounting frame in the slot.

CHAPTER 7: TROUBLESHOOTING

NEED HELP?

LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7

TECHNICAL

SUPPORT

1.877.877.2269

7.1 EXTERNAL FAILURE

TABLE 7-1. EXTERNAL FAILURE TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS

PROBLEM POSSIBLE REASON POSSIBLE SOLUTION
Matrix cannot be started anymore Fuse at the standard appliance outlet Check fuse

7.2 VIDEO INTERFERENCE

TABLE 7-2. VIDEO INTERFERENCE TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS

PROBLEM POSSIBLE REASON POSSIBLE SOLUTION
Cannot open the OSD No OSD jumper setSet jumper 11 on the CON unit
Incorrect video displayCable connection disabledCheck the connection, length and quality of the interconnect cable to the units

7.3 FAN MALFUNCTION

TABLE 7-3. FAN MALFUNCTION TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS

PROBLEMPOSSIBLE REASONPOSSIBLE SOLUTION
Fans only run under full loadCommunication to fan tray is not workingRemove and reinstall fan traySwap both fan trays to the other slotRestart the matrix
Fans do not run, LED OK onFans defectiveContact Black Box Technical Support at 877-877-2269 or info@blackbox.com
Fans do not run, LED OK offPower supplyCheck power supply and power connection

7.4 POWER SUPPLY UNITS MALFUNCTION

TABLE 7-4. POWER SUPPLY UNITS MALFUNCTION TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS

PROBLEMPOSSIBLE REASONPOSSIBLE SOLUTION
Matrix does not startPower supply units could not be locked correctlyCheck lock and plug-in of the power supply units
No power supply availableCheck if power supply cables are connected correctly
Power supply units are not switched onCheck switch on the power supply units

7.5 NETWORK ERROR

TABLE 7-5. NETWORK ERROR TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS

PROBLEMPOSSIBLE REASONPOSSIBLE SOLUTION
Network settings are not assumed after editingRestart of the matrix is not yet completedRestart the matrix

7.6 FAILURE AT THE MATRIX

TABLE 7-6. FAILURE AT THE MATRIX TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS

PROBLEM POSSIBLE REASON POSSIBLE SOLUTION
Serial control impossible or only restrictedly possibleCPU and matrix operating at different baud ratesChange baud rate in the matrix and CPU (see Section 4.3.2)
Serial control via RS-232 port not possible Wrong network cable Use a crossed network cable
Port definitions as USB 2.0 invalidRestart of the matrix not yet completedRestart the matrix

7.7 BLANK SCREEN

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - BLANK SCREEN - 1

text_image 1 2 3

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - BLANK SCREEN - 2

text_image 1 2 3

Black Box ACX288-ADCTL - BLANK SCREEN - 3

natural_image Simple diagram of a rectangular object with a small circular mark and the number 3 at its tip (no text or symbols on the object itself)

FIGURE 7-1. LEDS ON THE BACK AND FRONT.OF THE UNIT

TABLE 7-7. BLANK SCREEN TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS

PROBLEM POSSIBLE REASON POSSIBLE SOLUTION
Monitors remain dark after switching operationSwitching to a CPU port without an active source (computer, CPU)Switching to a CPU port with an active source (computer, CPU)
LED 1 ON or LED 2 OFFConnections CON unit, matrix and CPU unitCheck connected cables and connectors. (No cable, cable break, CPU/CON unit offline, CPU/CON unit connected to the wrong port)
LED 3 OFF Power supplyCheck power supply units and the connection to the power network

CHAPTER 8: TECHNICAL SUPPORT

NEED HELP?

LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7

TECHNICAL

SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

Before contacting technical support, make sure you have read this manual and then installed and set up your Modular KVM Matrix Switch as recommended.

8.1 SUPPORT CHECKLIST

To efficiently handle your request, make sure that you have the following information available before you call:

  • Company, name, phone number and email
  • Type and serial number of the device (see bottom of device)
  • Nature, circumstances and duration of the problem

Components included in the system (such as graphic source/CPU, OS, graphic card, monitor, USB-HID/USB 2.0 devices, interconnect cable) including manufacturer and model number

◆ Results from any testing you have done

Contact Black Box Technical Support at 877-877-2269 or info@blackbox

8.2 SHIPPING CHECKLIST

  1. To return your device, contact your Black Box Technical Support at 877-877-2269 or info@blackbox.com to obtain an RMA (Return Material Authorization) number.
  2. Package your devices carefully, preferably using the original box. Add all pieces that you received originally.
  3. Note your RMA number visibly on your shipment.

NOTE: Devices that are sent in without a RMA number cannot be accepted. The shipment will be sent back without being opened, postage unpaid.

9.1 FCC STATEMENT

This equipment has been found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

Shielded cables must be used with this equipment to maintain compliance with radio frequency energy emission regulations and ensure a suitably high level of immunity to electromagnetic disturbances.

All power supplies are certified to the relevant major international safety standards.

9.2 CE DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

The Modular KVM Matrix Switch as delivered complies with the provisions of the following European Directives:

◆ 2014/30/EU Council Directive on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility
2014/35/EU Council Directive on the harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to the making available on the market of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits.

9.3 PRODUCT SAFETY

The product safety of the devices is proven by the compliance to the following standards:

IEC 60950-1A1:2010
EN 60950-1/A12:2011/A1:2010/A11:2009
UL 60950-1-2007
CAN/CSA-C22.2 60950-1-07

9.4 WEEE

The manufacturer complies with the EU Directive 2012/19/EU on the prevention of waste electrical and electronic equipment (WEEE).

9.5 ROHS/ROHS2

This device complies with the Directive 2011/65/EU of the European Parliament and of the council of 8 June 2011 on the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment (RoHS 2, RoHS II).

10.1 VIDEO AND KVM TECHNOLOGY TERMS

AES/EBU: Digital audio standard that is officially known as AES3 and that is used for carrying digital audio signals between devices.

CATx: Any CAT5e, CAT6, CAT7 cable.

CGA: Color Graphics Adapter (CGA) is an old analog graphic standard with up to 16 displayable colors and a maximum resolution of 640 x 400 pixels.

Component Video: Component Video (YPbPr) is a high-quality video standard that consists of three independently and separately transmittable video signals, the luminance signal and two color difference signals.

Composite Video: Composite Video is also called CVBS and it is part of the PAL TV standard.

CON Unit: Component of a KVM Extender or Media Extender to connect to the console (monitor[s], keyboard and mouse; optionally also with USB 2.0 devices).

Console: Keyboard, mouse and monitor.

CPU Unit: Component of a KVM Extender or Media Extender to connect to a source (computer, CPU).

CVBS: The analog color video baseband signal (CVBS) is also called Composite Video and it is part of the PAL TV standard.

DDC: Display Data Channel (DDC) is a serial communication interface between monitor and source (computer, CPU). It allows a data exchange via a monitor cable and an automatic installation and configuration of a monitor driver by the operating system.

DisplayPort: A VESA standardized interface for an all-digital transmission of audio and video data. It is differentiated between the DisplayPort standards 1.1 and 1.2. The signals have LVDS level.

Dual Access: A system to operate a source (computer, CPU) from two consoles.

Dual Link: A DVI-D interface for resolutions up to 2560 x 2048 by signal transmission of up to 330 MPixel/s (24-bit).

Dual-Head: A system with two video connections.

DVI: Digital video standard, introduced by the Digital Display Working Group (http://www.ddwg.org). Single Link and Dual Link standards are distinguished. The signals have TMDS level.

DVI-I: A combined signal (digital and analog) that allows running a VGA monitor at a DVI-I port—in contrast to DVI-D (see DVI).

EGA: The Enhanced Graphics Adapter (EGA) is an old analog graphic standard, introduced by IBM in 1984. A DB9 connector is used for connection.

Fiber: Single-mode or multimode fiber cables.

HDMI: An interface for an all-digital transmission of audio and video data. It is differentiated between the HDMI standards 1.0 to 1.4a. The signals have TMDS level.

KVM: Keyboard, video and mouse.

Mini-XLR: Industrial standard for electrical plug connections (3-pole) for the transmission of digital audio and control signals.

Multimode: 62.5μ multimode fiber cable or 50μ multimode fiber cable.

OSD: The On-Screen Display is used to display information or to operate a device.

Quad-Head: A system with four video connections.

RCA (Cinch): A non-standard plug connection for transmission of electrical audio and video signals, especially with coaxial cables.

S/PDIF: A digital audio interconnect that is used in consumer audio equipment over relatively short distances.

SFP: SFPs (Small Form Factor Pluggable) are pluggable interface modules for Gigabit connections. SFP modules are available for CATx and fiber interconnect cables.

Single Link: A DVI-D interface for resolutions up to 1920 x 1200 by signal transmission of up to 165 MPixel/s (24-bit). Alternative frequencies are Full HD (1080p), 2K HD (2048 x 1080) and 2048 x 1152.

CHAPTER 10: GLOSSARY

Single-Head: A system with one video connection.

Single-mode: 9μ single-mode fiber cable.

S-Video (Y/C): S-Video (Y/C) is a video format transmitting luminance and chrominance signals separately. It has a higher quality standard than CVBS.

TOSLINK: Standardized fiber connection system for digital transmission of audio signals (F05 plug connection).

Triple-Head: A system with three video connections.

USB-HID: USB-HID devices (Human Interface Device) allow for data input. There is no need for a special driver during installation; "New USB-HID device found" is reported. Typical HID devices include keyboards, mice, graphics tablets and touch screens. Storage, video and audio devices are not HID.

VGA: Video Graphics Array (VGA) is a computer graphics standard with a typical resolution of 640 x 480 pixels and up to 262,144 colors. It can be seen as a follower of the graphics standards MDA, CGA and EGA.

10.2 MATRIX-SPECIFIC TERMS

Auto Disconnect: Matrix function that allows an automatic disconnect between a console and a CPU if OSD is opened via this console.

Auto Logout: Matrix function that describes the duration of inactivity after the user has been logged out from the OSD at this console.

CON Device: Logical term that summarizes several physical extenders to switch more complex console systems via matrix.

CON Timeout: Matrix function that allows an automatic disconnect of a console from the connected CPU after a predefined time.

Console ACL: Console Access Control List is a list that shows the respective switching rights for the various consoles.

CPU Auto Connect: Matrix function that allows an automatic connection establishment between a console and a random CPU that is available.

CPU Device: Logical term that summarizes several physical extenders to switch more complex CPU systems via matrix.

CPU Timeout: Matrix function that allows the user to disconnect after a predefined period of time of inactivity from the respective CPU.

EXT Unit: Part or extender board of a CON or CPU unit with a connection to the matrix. A CON or CPU unit can consist of several EXT devices.

Force Connect: Matrix function that allows you to switch a console to a CPU that is already used to take keyboard and mouse control. The console that is connected before switching loses K/M control, but keeps video.

Force Disconnect: Matrix function that allows you to switch a console to a CPU that is already used to take KVM control.

The console that is connected before switching loses complete KVM control.

Java Tool: Java based control and configuration tool for the Modular KVM Matrix Switch.

Keyboard Connect: Matrix function that allows taking over the keyboard control of an inactive console.

Macro Keys: Programmable keys that can execute a stringing together of commands to the matrix.

Mouse Connect: Matrix function that allows taking the mouse control of an inactive console.

Non-Blocking Access: Matrix configuration where no user can be disturbed by an activity of another user.

OSD Timeout: Matrix function that closes the OSD automatically after a predefined period of time of inactivity.

Release Time: Matrix function that allows a console that is connected with the same CPU to release the K/M control after a predefined time.

CHAPTER 10: GLOSSARY

NEED HELP?

LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7

TECHNICAL SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

Service Mode: Defined maintenance condition that allows updating of extenders that are connected to the matrix.

Tie Line: Communication connection to and between extension modules in a network environment.

User ACL: User Access Control List is a list that shows the respective switching rights for the various users.

Video Sharing: Matrix function that allows switching from the user's console to any CPU with video.

CHAPTER 11: DISCLAIMER/TRADEMARKS

NEED HELP?

LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7

TECHNICAL

SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

11.1 DISCLAIMER

Black Box Corporation shall not be liable for damages of any kind, including, but not limited to, punitive, consequential or cost of cover damages, resulting from any errors in the product information or specifications set forth in this document and Black Box Corporation may revise this document at any time without notice.

11.2 TRADEMARKS USED IN THIS MANUAL

Black Box and the Black Box logo type and mark are registered trademarks of Black Box Corporation.

Any other trademarks mentioned in this manual are acknowledged to be the property of the trademark owners.

NOTES

NEED HELP?

LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7

TECHNICAL

SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

NOTES

NEED HELP?

LE AVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7

TECHNICAL

SUPPORT

1.8 7 7.87 7.2269

NEED HELP?

LEAVE THE TECH TO US

LIVE 24/7

TECHNICAL

SUPPORT

1.87 7.8 7 7.2 269

Table of contents Click a title to access it
Manual assistant
Powered by Anthropic
Waiting for your message
Product information

Brand : Black Box

Model : ACX288-ADCTL

Category : Switch